JP2020130362A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To cause a player to concentrate on a game, in a game machine.SOLUTION: A game machine which includes performance control means capable of executing a performance related to a variation display game for variably displaying identification information and can generate a special game state advantageous to a player when a stop result of the variation display game is a special result, includes setting change means capable of changing a setting value according to a setting related to a game. The performance control means, in one variation display game, can execute a setting suggestion performance suggesting information on the setting value a plurality of times. By appearance of the setting suggestion performance, the degree of expectation that the stop result of the variation display game is a special result can be notified.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 57

Description

The present invention includes an effect control means capable of executing an effect related to a variable display game that displays identification information in a variable manner, and when the stop result of the variable display game is a special result, a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Regarding game machines that can generate.

Conventionally, there is a gaming machine capable of changing a setting (probability setting value) related to a gaming condition (for example, Patent Document 1).

The winning probability of a big hit (and a small hit) is associated with the probability setting value.

Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by performing the setting suggestion effect regarding the probability setting value.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 6-238056

However, the player does not concentrate on the game (such as looking around or checking the mobile phone) during the production that the player will see many times, for example, the reach production with low expectation of the big hit. However, there is a problem that even if a setting suggestion effect is performed during the effect, it is overlooked.

An object of the present invention is to concentrate a player on a game in a game machine.

In a typical embodiment of the present invention, a player is provided with an effect control means capable of performing an effect related to a variable display game that displays identification information in a variable manner, and when the stop result of the variable display game is a special result, a player. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that is advantageous to the game, the setting changing means capable of changing the setting value according to the setting related to the game is provided, and the effect control means relates to the setting value in the variable display game. The setting suggestion effect that suggests information can be executed a plurality of times, and the appearance of the setting suggestion effect makes it possible to notify the degree of expectation that the stop result of the variable display game will be a special result.

According to one embodiment of the present invention, the player can concentrate on the game.

It is a perspective view which looked at the game machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the production control system of a game machine. It is a figure explaining the transition state at the time of power-on of a game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the main process of a game control. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the main process of a game control. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation process. It is a figure which shows the display example of the performance display device. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure start port switch common processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure hold information determination processing (first half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure hold information determination processing (the latter half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the look-ahead jackpot determination processing. Special Figure 1 is a flowchart showing a procedure of game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 game processing (the first half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 game processing (the latter half). Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ordinary processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of ordinary processing. Special FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a procedure of fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 variation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fall lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a table exemplifying the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, and the fall probability. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing. It is a table exemplifying the distribution of the type of jackpot. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a procedure of information setting processing. Special Figure 2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of information setting processing. Special FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a variation pattern setting process. Special FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of fluctuation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the time shortening fluctuation number update process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing during fluctuation. Special FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing during fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the special figure 1 display process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fanfare / interval processing (first half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the fanfare / interval processing (the latter half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 2. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 3. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing in small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the received command check process. It is a flowchart which shows the received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the single-shot command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead fluctuation system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variable system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the variation effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a hit system command processing. It is a time chart of the setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a table which shows an example of the reliability of the setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. This is an example of a table showing the relationship between the setting suggestion effect and the jackpot according to the first embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram of the setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a time chart of the 1st modification of the setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (first half) of the 1st modification of the setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (second half) of the 1st modification of the setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a time chart of the 2nd modification of the setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (first half) of the 2nd modification of the setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (second half) of the 2nd modification of the setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of another setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram explaining another example of another setting suggestion effect which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a table which shows the correspondence relationship between the work setting value of the game machine of 2nd Embodiment, the display probability setting value (setting example 1, 2, 3, 4), and the effect control information. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation process of the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display mode of the display probability setting value of setting example 2 in the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 3 or the setting example 4 of the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the 1st modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of setting example 2 in the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the 2nd modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the 3rd modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the 4th modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the 5th modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the single-shot command processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the hall / player setting mode processing which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the setting change state which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. This is another example of the front view of the game board when the setting is changed according to the third embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the signal output and the like in the special gaming state of a normal operation which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the signal output and the like when the power failure occurs in the special gaming state which concerns on 4th Embodiment, and it recovers normally by the power restoration. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of a signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state which concerns on 4th Embodiment, and a memory abnormality occurs by power recovery. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the signal output and the like when the power failure occurs in the special gaming state which concerns on 4th Embodiment, and it recovers normally by the power restoration and shifts to the setting confirmation state. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the signal output and the like when the power failure occurs in the special gaming state which concerns on 4th Embodiment, and it recovers normally by the power restoration and shifts to the setting change state. A timing chart showing an example of timing such as signal output when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state according to the fourth embodiment, the power is restored to normal by power recovery, the setting is changed, and then the power is turned off. Is.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the description of the game machine, the front, back, left, and right refer to the direction seen from the player during the game.

[Overall view of the game machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a game machine.

The game machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame that is rotatably attached to the frame 11 fixed to the island equipment via a hinge. The opening / closing frame is composed of a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area that makes the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 visible.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) arranged on the back surface side of the game board 30 can be accessed. Can be done.

Various frame constituent members are arranged on the edge portion around the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15.

In the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15, a decorative device 1 capable of producing light emission according to the game state 1
8a and 18b are arranged. The decoration devices 18a and 18b accommodate lighting members such as LEDs inside, and perform a light emitting effect according to the game state. The lighting members arranged inside the decorative devices 18a and 18b form a part of the frame decorative device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper speaker 19a is arranged at the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15, respectively. Apart from these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided at the lower part of the game machine 10. The lower speaker 19b is arranged in the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the game machine 10 and projects forward (on the player side) is arranged. Protruding production unit 1
Reference numeral 3 denotes an effect device that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the progress state of the game. Protruding production unit 13
The lighting member arranged inside the frame also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower part of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to the ball launcher (not shown) one by one.

The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that receives an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. ..

The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25.
It is provided in the center of the upper part of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate it.

By operating the effect operation device by the player, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the special figure variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or execute a notice effect that announces the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory in advance. It should be noted that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when it is simply a variable display game, this specification refers to a special figure variable display game.

Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only during the execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the effect operation device during the non-execution.

The game state when the variable display game is executed is composed of a plurality of game states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. Further, the special game state is, for example, a time saving state as a specific game state, a state in which a special result (for example, a big hit) is likely to occur in a variable display game (probability change state, a probability fluctuation state), or a big hit state (
It is a special game state) and a small hit game state (small hit state).

Here, the probability change state (specific game state) continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number cut type, ST), and There are things that continue until a predetermined probability fall lottery is won (fall lottery type).

Further, it may be possible to always generate a probabilistic state when a big hit occurs, without determining whether or not to generate a probabilistic state by a big hit symbol random number, or to provide a winning device or the like provided with a specific area to specify. A probabilistic state may be generated when the game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated when a player rents a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27 and a return button 28.
And a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when renting a game ball, and the return button 28 is a button for ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the game machine 10. This is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area for displaying the balance of a prepaid card or the like.

The decoration device 22 is a device that houses a lighting member such as an LED inside and performs a light emitting effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided on the front side portion of the upper plate unit. The lighting member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of the ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball can be stored in the lower part of the front frame 12 below the glass frame 15 including the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like. A lower plate 23 is provided.

The operation handle 24 is located at the lower right of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 into the game area 32 of the game board 30. The rate of fire of the game ball launched from the ball launcher is set to increase as the amount of rotation of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launcher launches a game ball into the game area (speed).
The firing force can be changed in response to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game ball can be launched in various launch modes having different firing forces. The launch mode includes a left-handed hit (normal hit) in which the game ball is made to flow down on the left side of the game area 32, and a right-handed hit in which the game ball is made to flow down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit at a predetermined distance from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball extraction hole 23a that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing operation unit 23b for opening and closing the ball extraction hole 23a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation unit 23b to open the ball pulling hole 23a, the game ball stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball pulling hole 23a.

[Game board]
Subsequently, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 is a flat plate-shaped game board main body 3 that serves as a mounting base for various members.
It has 0a. The game board body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the game board body 30a
A game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the player. The game machine 10
It is configured to launch a game ball from a ball launcher into a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 to play a game. A windmill, an obstacle nail, or the like is arranged in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case (front component) 40 that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for a variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32. Behind the window formed in the center case 40, an effect display device (variable display device) that variablely displays (variablely displays) a plurality of identification information.
Display device 41 is arranged. The display device 41 is provided with, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the displayed contents can be visually recognized from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to the one provided with a liquid crystal display, and may be provided with a display such as an EL or CRT.

A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbol) and a character that directs a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

Further, in the center case 40, a game ball flowing down the game area 32 is placed in the center case 40.
An inflow port 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding the inside of the warp passage 40e and a stage portion 40b on which the game ball passing through the warp passage 40e can roll are provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting winning opening 36 and the ordinary variable winning device 37,
The game ball that has rolled on the stage portion 40b can easily win a prize in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper portion and the right side portion of the center case 40, respectively. Upper effect unit 40c and side effect unit 40d
Consists of a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34, the normal map variation display game is executed.

A general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball to these general winning openings 35 is performed by the winning opening switch (SW) provided in the general winning opening 35.
) 35a-35n (see FIG. 3).

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a start winning opening (starting port 1, first starting winning area) 36 for giving a start condition of the special figure variation display game is provided. Center case 40
In the game area 32 on the right side of the above, a normal variable winning device 37 (normal electric accessory, normal electric) provided with a second starting winning opening (starting port 2, second starting winning area) below the normal drawing start gate 34. Is provided. The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that slides so as to retract from the front to the back side to convert the game ball into a state in which the game ball can easily flow in. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball cannot win the normal variable winning device 37.
When the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, the special figure variable display game is executed as an auxiliary game. It should be noted that the starting winning opening 36 is likely to win a game ball when hitting left, and the normal variable winning device 37 is easy to win a game ball when hitting right.

The movable member 37b is a slide opening / closing type ordinary electric accessory, and operates via the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode. When opened, the game ball changes to an open state in which the game ball easily flows into the normally variable winning device 37 (a winning state that is advantageous for the player).

The movable member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100, which will be described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of a winning easy state by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game and setting the hit probability of the normal map fluctuation display game to a higher probability than usual, or a normal game state. By making the time for which the easy-to-win state occurs longer than the easy-to-win state that occurs in the above-mentioned specific game state, a time-saving state (general electric support state) is generated. In addition, the probability change state (
Even in the latent probability change state), the time saving state (Public power support state) occurs in duplicate.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the starting winning opening 36, the lower large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 7).
A first special variable winning device 38 (special electric accessory) having an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c that opens the lower winning opening is provided by retracting from the front to the back. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the large winning opening from the closed state (closed state unfavorable to the player) to the open state (gaming state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game. By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the large prize opening, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In the lower prize opening, a lower prize opening switch 38a (count switch) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. It should be noted that the first special variable winning device 38 can easily win a game ball when hitting to the right.

In the game area 32 above the normal variable winning device 37, the upper winning opening solenoid 39b (FIG. 3)
A second special variable winning device 39 having an opening / closing door 39c that opens the upper winning opening by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the right side is provided. 2nd special variable winning device 39
Converts the big prize opening from the closed state (closed state unfavorable to the player) to the open state (special game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and the game ball into the big prize opening. By facilitating the inflow of the game, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In the large winning opening, an upper large winning opening switch 39a (count switch) (see FIG. 3) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. It should be noted that the second special variable winning device 39 can easily win a game ball when hitting to the right. Further, the lower prize opening switch 38a and the upper prize opening switch 39a are collectively referred to as the grand prize opening switch 43.

A specific area 86 (so-called V winning opening) is provided inside the second special variable winning device 39. When a game ball enters the specific area 86 (V winning opening), the probability change state after the big hit ends (
High probability state, specific game state) is confirmed. The specific area 86 may be opened for a long time so that the game ball can easily pass through only in the case of a probability variation jackpot. The game control device 100 can detect the passage of the game ball to the specific area 86 (V prize) via a sensor (specific area switch 72 described later) or the like, and when the V prize is detected, the game control device 100 shifts to a probable change state after the jackpot ends. In addition to confirming that the operation is to be performed, information (such as a command for passing through a specific area) indicating that a V prize has been won is transmitted to the effect control device 300 described later. Then, the effect control device 300 displays the V prize in the display device 4.
It can be notified in 1 and the like.

General winning opening 35, starting winning opening 36, ordinary variable winning device 37, and special variable winning device 38
When a game ball wins a prize in the 39 major winning openings, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) discharges a number of prize balls according to the type of the winning winning opening from the payout device to the upper plate 21. Further, in the lower game area 32, an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize in the winning port or the like is provided. Further, in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 and their vicinity, LEDs capable of emitting light when a game ball wins a prize (a board decoration device described later). A part of 46) is arranged.

Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a normal figure variation display game are executed in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a outside the game area 32. A batch display device 50 is provided. The batch display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current gaming state.

The batch display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (special figure 1 display, lamp D1) and a second special figure fluctuation for a fluctuation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. The display unit 52 (special figure 2 display, lamp D2), the fluctuation display unit 53 for the normal figure fluctuation display game (normal figure display, lamps D8, D10, D18), and the start (hold) of each fluctuation display game. Storage display unit for notification of the number of stored images (Special figure 1 hold display 54, special figure 2 hold display 55, normal figure hold display 56)
) And. Special figure 1 The hold indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12.
The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 is composed of lamps D13 and D14. General figure hold indicator 56
Is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

Further, the batch display device 50 is provided with a first game state display unit 57 (first game state display, lamp) that notifies that it is a right-handed hit (when it should be right-handed) or a left-handed hit (when it should be hit normally). D7),
When the time saving state occurs, the second game state display unit 58 (second game state display, lamp D17) that lights up to notify the occurrence of the time saving state, and the jackpot probability state becomes a high probability state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on. The third game status display unit 59 (third game status display, probability status display unit, lamp D9), and the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39) are displayed. A round display unit 60 (lamps D3-D6) is provided.

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the variation display game is executed by the variation display in which the identification information (for example, the central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment type display unit.
It may be composed of an aggregate of a plurality of LEDs, and when a variable display is executed, all the LEDs provided as a display are turned on and off (all LEDs are blinking at the same time) or circulated on (any of them). It may be turned on and off in a predetermined order at predetermined time intervals from one LED), or may be turned on and off (blinking) or circulated by a predetermined number of LEDs among a plurality of LEDs. Also in the normal diagram display 53, the variation display game is executed by the variation display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. In addition, the normal figure display 53 is also a special figure 1 display 5
1. It can be appropriately configured in the same manner as the special figure 2 display 52.

The lamp display device 80 includes lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) that execute variable display (blinking) that repeats lighting display and extinguishing display as a symbol (fourth special symbol described later), and start of each special figure variation display game. (Hold) It has a lamp display unit 3-6 (LED) for notifying the number of stored items. The lamp display device 80 is controlled by the effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 1 and 2 blink at a predetermined blinking cycle (for example, 200 msec (millisecond)) as a variable display. While the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the general figure display 53 of the batch display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, the lamp of the lamp display device 80 The fluctuation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by the effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 3 and 4 (special figure 1 hold LED 1, special figure 1 hold LED 2) display the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) according to the combination of the off state, the lit state, and the blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (special figure 2 hold LED 1, special figure 2 hold LED 2) display the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) depending on the combination of the off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. To do. The lamp display unit 3-6 ends the display of the number of holds due to the occurrence of a big hit, but displays the number of holds in cases other than the state of the big hit (including the case where the display device 41 has a reach described later). Do.

Next, the flow of the game in the game machine 10, the normal map variation display game, and the special map variation display game will be described in detail.

In the game machine 10, a game is performed by launching a game ball from a ball launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, and the starting winning opening. 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38, 39 is won, or the ball flows into the out port 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when a game ball wins a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37, or a special variable winning device 38, 39, a number of winning balls corresponding to the type of winning winning opening will pay out the payout device. It is discharged to the upper plate 21 through.

The normal figure start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal figure start gate 34. When the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal map variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the hit determination random number value extracted at this time.

A state in which the normal map fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal map variable display game has already been played and the normal map variable display game has not ended, or when the result of the normal map variable display game is a hit, it is normal. When the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 when the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, the storage number is added (+1) if the normal drawing start storage number is less than the upper limit number.

The hit judgment random value for determining the hit / miss of the normal figure fluctuation display game is stored in the normal figure start memory, and when the hit judgment random value matches the judgment value, the normal figure fluctuation display is displayed. The game wins and a specific result mode (specific result) is derived.

The normal map variation display game is executed by the normal map display 53 provided in the batch display device 50. The normal figure display 53 is composed of LEDs that indicate a hit when the normal identification information (normal figure) is lit and a deviation when the normal identification information (normal figure) is off, and the normal identification information fluctuates by blinking the LED. The display is performed, and after a predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

When the normal figure random value extracted when passing through the normal figure start gate 34 is a hit value, the normal symbol displayed on the normal figure display 53 stops in the hit state and becomes the hit state. At this time, by driving the solenoid solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 37b is converted into the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 Winning is allowed.

The winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning of the ordinary variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game.
A game ball that has won a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 is detected as a start winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number.

When the start winning ball of the special figure fluctuation display game is detected, the jackpot random number value, the jackpot symbol random value, each fluctuation pattern random value, and the like are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as the special figure start winning memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, up to 8 times). The stored number of the special figure start prize memory is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 for notifying the start prize number of the batch display device 50, and the display device 4
It is also displayed on the display screen of 1.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning of the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. Further, the game control device 100 is displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory.
Run a variable display game.

The special figure 1 variable display game (1st special figure variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (2nd special figure variable display game) have identification information (identification information) on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. This is performed by displaying the special symbol (special symbol) in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying the predetermined result mode.

In the present embodiment, the game machine 10 is a so-called simultaneous variable machine, and the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be put into an execution state at the same time (both) independently of each other. When a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game (there is no small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game in this embodiment), the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a loss result. To do. When a big hit occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game, the running special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a loss result.

If a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game, the running special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted. In this case, special figure 1 game processing timer interrupts the measurement of the fluctuation time, and special figure 1
The derivation of the result of the variable display game (display of the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number) can be postponed, and the interrupted special figure 1 variable display game can be restarted after the small hit operation related to the special figure 2 variable display game is completed. ..

Further, when the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 by right-handed in the normal game state, the special figure 2 variable display game starts to fluctuate, but basically fluctuates for a long time (long fluctuation, for example, 10 minutes). During this period, if a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game, the game will be forcibly removed and stopped.

Further, the display device 41 executes a decorative special figure variation display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) are variablely displayed corresponding to each special figure variation display game.

In the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers and the like is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol). ) Is started, the fluctuating symbols are sequentially stopped after a predetermined time, and the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 performs various effect displays such as the appearance of characters in order to improve the interest. Further, in the decorative special symbol variation display game, as another decorative special symbol (identification information), the fourth special symbol is displayed by repeating (blinking) the lighting display and the extinguishing display on the lamp display units 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80. fluctuate. The fluctuation display of the lamp display units 1 and 2 is stopped after a predetermined time from the start by "turning off" in the case of a miss and "lighting" in the case of a big hit or a small hit.

Regarding the decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed on different display devices or different display areas, or the same display may be executed. It may be executed in the device or the display area. Further, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game may be simultaneously executed (executed state).

When the game ball is awarded to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the jackpot random number value at the time of winning is the jackpot value), as a result of the special figure variation display game. A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the displayed symbol, and the jackpot state (
It becomes a special game state). Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

At this time, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are the large winning opening solenoids (38b, 39b) (
By energizing (see FIG. 3), the big winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). That is, the large winning openings provided in the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are wide open until a predetermined time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and during this time, the player can acquire many game balls. Granted.

When the game ball is won in the first starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is the small hit value), the special figure variation display game As a result of the above, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the displayed symbol, and the small hit state is obtained. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a small hit result mode. In the present embodiment, the big hit random value is also used for the small hit determination, but the small hit value (small hit determination value) is different from the big hit value (big hit determination value).

At this time, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are the large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b (FIG. 3).
By energizing (see), the big winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time.
In addition, since the full opening time of the big winning opening is shorter in the small hit state (small hit game state) than in the big hit state (special game state), the game that the player can acquire in the small hit state than in the big hit state. The value (number of acquired balls) is small. In both the small hit state and the big hit state, the big winning opening is open, but the big hit state may be called the first special gaming state, and the small hit state may be called the second special gaming state.

Here, the difference between a big hit and a small hit will be described.

A big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and a small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. This means that a specific flag is set for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38, 39. The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set as in the case of winning the small hit lottery, for example. In addition, "
The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has the meaning of.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. Is released.

The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate indicators or the same indicator, but the special figure variation display games are not executed at the same time. Is set.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

Further, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36 in the starting winning opening 36 is not particularly limited.
a, The start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the count switch (38a, 39a) in the normal variable winning device 37 are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and a magnetic field is generated when a metal approaches the coil. A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing a changing phenomenon is used. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 or the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 or the like is used as a machine. Microswitches with similar contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the game machine 10. The game machine 10 is a game control device 10.
The game control device 100 includes 0 (main board), and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that comprehensively controls the game, and is a CPU unit having a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It is composed of 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

The CPU unit 110 is a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
It includes a U) 111, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that generates an operating clock of a CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 include DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A predetermined level of DC voltage such as V is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V or DC5V from the voltage of DC32V. , Game microcomputer 11
Control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that have a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 1 and a power failure monitoring circuit to notify the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure. The control signal generation unit 430 and the like for generating and outputting the above are provided.

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100,
The backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 may be configured to be provided on a separate board or integrally with the game control device 100, that is, on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 43 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the embodiment.
By setting 0, it is possible to exclude from the exchange target and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 (
In particular, the data supplied to the built-in RAM) and stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or power failure. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. RAM
When the initialization switch 112 is pressed down and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated.
Based on this, the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RA in the payout control device 200
The process of forcibly initializing the information stored in M is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is the game microcomputer 1
It is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by 11. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

Further, the game control device 100 (main board) includes a setting key switch 93. The setting key switch 93 makes it possible to change the probability set value (set value) according to the setting related to the game condition (game) by turning it on by the operator's rotation operation or the like. The RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a setting value change switch that can change the probability setting value according to the operation of the operator. In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting a winning probability such as a big hit probability or a small hit probability, but other game conditions (effects, etc.) other than the probability are also changed according to the probability setting value. It is possible. The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are
A setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing the setting (probability setting value) related to the game condition is configured. In addition to the RAM initialization switch 112, another switch may also serve as the setting value changing switch, or may provide a dedicated setting value changing switch.

The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the game machine 10 and are arranged at a position (inaccessible position) that cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. Will be done. That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112.

As will be described later, when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on (power failure recovery, power recovery), the game machine 10 sets a probability setting value according to the on / off state of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112. It is possible to shift to various states such as a changeable setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed.

In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is defined in, for example, 6 steps, and the probability setting value 1 (setting 1) is defined.
), Probability setting value 2 (setting 2), probability setting value 3 (setting 3), probability setting value 4 (setting 4), probability setting value 5 (setting 5), probability setting value 6 (setting 6). In general, setting 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting for the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the probability setting change process, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed by the operator, the work setting value (setting) in the work setting value area is set to the setting value 0 (setting 1, probability setting value 1).
→ Setting value 1 (setting 2, probability setting value 2) → Setting value 2 (setting 3, probability setting value 3) → Setting value 3 (setting value 3)
Setting 4, probability setting value 4) → setting value 4 (setting 5, probability setting value 5) → setting value 5 (setting 6, probability setting value 6) → setting value 0 (setting 1) → setting value 1 (setting 2) → ... is changed. In this way, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a setting value change switch. For convenience of explanation, the work setting values 0 to 5 are provided corresponding to the probability setting values 1 to 6 in the setting change state (setting change mode), but the work setting value and the probability setting value are the same. It may be treated as the same in the numerical range (that is, 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) (the work set value and the probability set value are set to the same numerical value).

Instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value changing switch), the setting key switch 93 may be rotated to a predetermined position to change the probability setting value. Moreover, the probability setting value is not limited to 6 steps. Then, the performance display device 152 in which the display probability setting value corresponding to the selected work setting values 0 to 5 is, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot Dp) display. Etc. are displayed.

The game microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a.
, Read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b and RA that can be read and written at any time
It is provided with M (random access memory) 111c.

The ROM 111b non-volatilely stores invariant information (program, fixed data, determination value of various random numbers, etc.) for game control. The RAM 111c is used as a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area for various signals and random values during game control. Information on the game (game information) is stored, and the stored information is stored even if a power failure occurs. Is a possible retention and storage means. An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c.

Further, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and fluctuation before the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. When the special result mode is adopted, the gaming state is advantageous for the player (special gaming state).
At the stage where some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed in the game machine 10.
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display is performed. No display mode. The reach state also includes, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After the display, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same identification information). (However, the special result mode is excluded) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from the reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as a system (type) of reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode (big hit mode) is different (the degree of expectation is different), normal reach (N reach), Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP)
2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set.
The expected value (expected value) of the jackpot is increased in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, the reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a big hit random number for determining a big hit in a special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining a big hit symbol, and a small hit for determining a small hit symbol. Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers, etc. for determining fluctuation patterns in symbol random numbers and special figure fluctuation display games (including execution time of fluctuation display games in various reach and fluctuation display without reach) A clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (millisec)) with respect to the CPU 111a based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit is provided. ing.

Further, the CPU 111a is the ROM 111b in the process related to the special figure variation display game.
Acquire any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in. Specifically, the CPU 111a determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state, and the start memory number. Based on the above, one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Here, CPU 11
1a serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out.
Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit 600, and controls for paying out the ball lending.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (panel radio wave sensor) for detecting the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a gate switch 34a of the normal drawing start gate 34, and a start port 1 in the first start winning opening 36. Switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning opening 37 (normal variable winning device), winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35, special variable winning device 38
, 39 big prize opening switch 43 (lower big prize opening switch 38a, upper big winning opening switch 39a
), And the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V.
An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided which receives a negative logic signal such as the above and converts it into a 0V-5V positive logic signal.

Further, the interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is connected to the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, and the out ball detection switch 74. Specific area switch 72
Detects the passage of the game ball (V winning) into the specific area 86 (V winning opening). The remaining ball discharge port switch 73 detects a game ball that has passed through the remaining ball discharge port that discharges the game balls from the special variable winning devices 38 and 39. The out-ball detection switch 74 may detect only the game balls that pass through the out port 30b, or may detect all the game balls that have been fired into the game area and finished the game.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126, and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 43 are input to the third input port 124. ..

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, or the out ball detection switch 74 is input to the fourth input port 126.

Further, the second input port 123 has a detection signal of a magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, and a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10. A vibration sensor 6 that detects signals from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) provided on the switch 63, the front frame 12 (main body frame), and vibration of the game machine 10.
The signal from 5 is input.

Further, the second input port 123 takes in the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the third input port 124 is an enable signal CE by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 indicates a frame radio wave illegal signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. Overflow switch signal, touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, RAM initialization switch 1
A first input port 122 is provided which takes in the signal from 12 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored (full) in the lower plate 23. The frame radio wave invalid signal is a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame) detecting the radio wave, and the payout busy signal is in a state where the payout control device 200 can accept a command. It is a signal indicating whether or not.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122, and is taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, and is output from the output unit 13.
It is supplied to each port of 0. Further, the reset signal RST is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130 to turn off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test apparatus. It is configured as follows.

Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is used for each port 122, 123 of the input unit 120.
, 124 is not supplied. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 just before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the game microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input from the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of an accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the game machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that the state cannot be obtained is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not go through the buffer, and the like. There is. The game microcomputer 11 is connected to the port on the relay board 70.
The chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 has a solenoid (general electric solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 to open the normal variable winning device 37, and a lower large winning opening solenoid 38b (large winning opening) to open the first special variable winning device 38. Solenoid 1), upper prize opening solenoid 39b (large prize opening solenoid 2) for opening the second special variable winning device 39, and lever solenoid 86b for operating the lever to open the specific area 86. Two output ports 134 are provided.

Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. On / on the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected
A fourth output port 136 for outputting off-data is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with information about the game machine 10 such as jackpot information at the external information terminal 71.
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and provides information about the game machine 10 to the outside. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the normal electric solenoid 37 output from the second output port 134.
Current supply of the batch display device 50 output from the first driver (drive circuit) 138a and the third output port 135 that receive the open / close data signals of c and the winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b and generate and output the solenoid drive signal. The second driver 138b that outputs the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the side, and the third driver that outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current drawing side of the batch display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136. A fourth driver 138d is provided which outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to the external device such as a management device to the external information terminal 71.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. In addition, the batch display device 50
DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the above. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via the segment wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 2 and the LEDs are turned on. Fourth, which outputs an external information signal to the external information terminal 71
Since the driver 138d gives a level of 12V to the external information signal, DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each game machine to an external inspection device 500. Photocoupler 13
Reference numeral 9 denotes a game microcomputer 111, which is configured to be capable of bilateral communication so that data can be transmitted and received by serial communication with the inspection device 500. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code), etc.) output from the second output port 134, and receives the performance display device 152 (status display device). A driver 150 for driving is provided. In the present embodiment, the performance display device 152 is composed of a plurality of (4) 7-segment type (8-segment type including dot Dp) display (LED lamp), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. It is not limited to.

Although the performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board),
It may be provided in another place. For example, the performance display device 152 can display a display probability set value, an accessory ratio, a ball ejection rate, and the number of ejected balls.

Here, the number of ejected balls is the number of game balls ejected from the game area 32 (also referred to as the number of out balls).
It is the total of the number of game balls that have passed through the winning opening (the number of winnings) and the number of game balls that have passed through the out opening 30b. The number of ejected balls counts the signal of the out ball detection switch 74 and the like.
Can be obtained by doing. In the present embodiment, the winning openings include a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), and a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2).
), And special variable winning devices 38 and 39 (large winning openings) are included.

The ball output rate is the ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls to the number of ejected balls (or the number of launched balls).
It is calculated by multiplying the number of acquired balls by the number of ejected balls (%). That is, the ball output rate is the number of acquired balls (total number of prize balls) per 100 ejected balls.

For example, the bonus ratio is in the jackpot state out of the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by winning a prize in the prize opening during a predetermined period (for example, from the power-on of the game machine 10 to the present). It is the ratio (%) (= so-called continuous character ratio) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired by the character) obtained by winning the big prize opening. In addition, the accessory ratio may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (in the big hit state and the small hit state) obtained by winning the big prize opening (= big prize opening ratio) to the total number of prize balls. Or, the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the large prize opening and the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening) (= the so-called bonus ratio (total bonus ratio) commonly used )) May be used.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 4
Is a block diagram of the effect control system of the game machine 10.

The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111.
), And VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , A sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output is provided in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speaker 19.

The main control microcomputer 311 is a P that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
Program ROM 321 consisting of ROM (programmable read-only memory), RAM 322 that provides a work area, Fe that can retain stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure.
A RAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, instructs the VDP 312 of the output video content, and uses the sound source LSI 314.
It executes processing such as instructing the playback sound to, turning on the decorative lamp, controlling the drive of the motor and solenoid, and managing the production time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30 from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311.
C, a synchronization signal STS that gives the data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
Waits to notify the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Command I / F3
The decorative special figure hold number command, the decorative special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via the game control device 100 are received as the effect control command signal (effect command). .. The game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 is DC5.
Since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at V and operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). Frame decoration LED control circuit 333, game board 3 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an provided LED (light emitting diode).
Board effect device 44 (for example, display device 41) provided at 0 (including the center case 40)
A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control a movable accessory (such as a movable accessory) that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display in. The panel decoration device 46 includes the lamp display device 8 described above.
0 may be included.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided on the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the initial position and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and a volume control switch provided in the effect control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of the 335 and inputs the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration.
DC32V for driving a motor or solenoid, a display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor or LED, in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to or an electronic component controlled by the motor. DC5 which is the power supply voltage of command I / F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, LED, and speaker.

Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC- for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. In addition, DC-
The DC converter may be usually provided in the power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPRESET signal) and sound source LSI314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
, The amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332-334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control the lamp and the motor are supplied to reset the state. Further, the effect control device 300 has a cooling FA that cools various parts of the game machine 10.
The cooling FAN 45 is driven when the N45 is connected and the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described. Game control device 1
The CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of 00 extracts a random value for hit determination in the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34 and stores it in the ROM 111b. Compared with the judgment value, the hit / miss of the normal map fluctuation display game is judged.

Then, after displaying the identification symbol variable for a predetermined time on the normal map display, the normal map variation display game for stopping and displaying is displayed. When the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the normal figure display, the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example,). (0.3 seconds) Control to open as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control executing means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of alignment, the normal map display is controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the start winning prize (starting memory) is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, and the jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variation display game is made based on the starting memory. The random value for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine the hit / miss of the special figure 1 variation display game.

Further, the start memory is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and the random value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game is memorized based on the start memory. Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b, and the hit / miss of the special figure 2 variation display game is determined.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, the special figure variation display game is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 after the identification symbol is variablely displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32. Make.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling the light emission of various LEDs, based on the control signal from the game control device 100.
That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and generates a special game state. Let me. In the process of generating the special gaming state, the CPU 111a
For example, the large winning opening solenoid 39b opens the opening / closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39 to control the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening.

Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the big winning opening, or a predetermined opening time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the big winning opening. One round (R) is to open the big winning opening until the above condition is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times) control (cycle game). I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means that controls opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability change state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state. Further, regardless of which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game results in a high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game Both are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the normal fluctuation operating state, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is compared with the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the normal operating state. Since it is controlled so that the opening time of the is substantially increased, the normal electric power support state is established. In addition, even in the high probability state (normal probability change state) excluding the latent probability change state, the normal electric support (electric support) is executed by overlapping the time saving state.

For example, in the time saving state, the execution time of the above-mentioned normal map fluctuation display game (normal map fluctuation time)
Is possible to shorten the time to make the second fluctuation display time shorter than the normal first fluctuation display time (for example, 10000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation time) is also shorter than usual, and the time reduction fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is also executed.

In addition, in the time saving state, the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is set to the first.
Second stop time (eg 704 msec) shorter than stop time (eg 1604 msec)
It is possible to control so as to be.

Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is the first opening time (for example, 100 msec) in the normal state. It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer (for example, 1352 msec).

Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening time (for example, 2 times) is obtained with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number of times (for example, 4 times). Further, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map variation display game (normal figure probability) can be set to a higher probability than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operating state.

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. As a result, in the time-saving state, the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 becomes easier than in the normal game state, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per unit time can be increased as compared with the normal game state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states with different changes. Further, in the normal operating state, the movable member 3
It may be set so that 7b is not opened (probability of normal drawing is 0). Further, when a hit occurs, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated.

[Transition state when power is turned on]
FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a transition state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on (power restoration). As described above, depending on the on / off state of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on, the state shifts to four states (modes) as shown in FIG.

First, when the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on when the power is turned on, the probability setting value (setting value) can be changed in the setting variable state (setting change state,
Shift to the setting change mode) (see A1027-A1036 and FIG. 8 in FIG. 6B).

Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is off when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed (FIG. FIG. 6B A1031-A1036 and FIG. 8).

Further, when the power is turned on, the setting key switch 93 is off, but the RAM initialization switch 11
When 2 is turned on, the state shifts to the RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode), and R
The AM initialization process (RAM clear process) is executed to initialize the RAM 111c (see A1042-1044 in FIG. 6B).

If the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode), and the power is simply recovered.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a game machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 is mainly performed in the main process shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B and in a predetermined time cycle (4 msec (millisecond) in this embodiment) in FIG. 7.
It consists of timer interrupt processing shown in. That is, the game control program corresponding to the control processing of the game microcomputer 111 is composed of a main program (caller routine) corresponding to the main processing and an interrupt processing program (interrupt processing routine) corresponding to the timer interrupt processing. ..

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. 6A and 6B are flowcharts showing a procedure of main processing by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is represented as "A ***".

As shown in FIG. 6A, when the game control device 100 starts the main process, it first executes a process of disabling interrupts (A1001). Further, a stack pointer setting process for setting the stack pointer, which is the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs, is executed (A1002).

Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch prohibition signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). That is, the signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read.

Further, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). A game control device 1 that serves as a main control means by setting a predetermined initial value in the power delay timer.
A waiting time (for example, 3) for waiting until the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to the instruction from 00 starts normally.
Seconds) is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can be prevented from missing a command. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and delays the activation of the slave control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 3).
It serves as a waiting means for setting a predetermined waiting time for waiting for the activation of (00, etc.).

Further, the timing of the power delay timer is performed using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. that is not subject to validity determination) that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). As a result, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, a part of R
Since it is not necessary to exclude the AM region for calculation, it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

By reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the standby time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are operated or the power is turned on after the standby time has elapsed. It is necessary to continue to operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 from the time until the elapse of the standby time. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 performed at the time of turning on the power cannot be accepted without performing such a troublesome operation. Can be prevented.

When the power delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes time counting of the standby time and a process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A).
1010).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first reads the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus to determine whether or not a power failure has occurred. (A1008). When a power failure occurs (the result of A1008 is "Y"), the player waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

The game control device 100 has no power failure (the result of A1008 is "N").
, The power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (A1009), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer is 0 (A1010). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1010 is "N"), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to step A1008.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power failure are retained. Therefore, when a power failure occurs here, backup processing is performed. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1010 is "Y"".
), That is, when the standby time has expired, access to RWM (read / write memory) that can be read and written in RAM, EEPROM, etc. is permitted (A1011), and off-data is output to all output ports (state where there is no output). (Set to) (A1012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port previously mounted on the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in the present embodiment) (A1013). ).

Further, here, the driver 150 for driving the performance display device 152 (state display device) may be initially set. The game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the contents of the initial setting to the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits the command to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED (each segment) of the performance display device 152. The game control device 100 sets the number of digits used in the performance display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of digits used is four.

Next, the game control device 100 generates a CTC (Counter / Timer C) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator).
ircuit) Start the circuit (A1014). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator is a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a CP based on the divided signal.
The U111a is provided with a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 indicates RA indicating an abnormality in the RAM (here, RAM 111c).
The M abnormality flag is set (A1015). Here, the flag of the assumption of abnormality is once set in a predetermined register.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1016). And if it is normal (A101
The result of 6 is “Y”), and it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017).

Further, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1017 is “Y”), the game control device 100 calculates a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, a game control work area) in the RWM. The calculation process is executed (A1018), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum and the checksum at the time of power failure match (A1019). If the checksums match (A1019 result is "Y"), the RAM is normal and the RAM indicates a RAM error.
Clear the error flag (A1020). After that, the process proceeds to step A1021.

Further, when the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1016 is "N" or the result of A1017 is "N"), the checksums do not match. (The result of A1019 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1021 without clearing the RAM error flag.

Next, the game control device 100 has a setting key switch 93 and a RAM initialization switch 112.
It is determined whether or not both of the switches are on (A1021). When both switches are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 shifts to the setting variable state (setting change mode), and executes the process during the probability setting change in steps A1027-A1037. ..

In the game control device 100, when at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is “N”), the RAM (here, RAM)
It is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag indicating the abnormality of 111c) is set (A102).
2). When the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023). When the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), step A103
1-A1037 Probability Setting confirmation processing (setting confirmation state, setting confirmation mode), RAM initialization processing (RAM clear processing) in step A1041-144, or step A1
The normal power-on (power recovery) processing of 041, A1045, and A1046 is executed.

The game control device 100 has (A1023) when the probability setting changing flag is set.
The result is "Y"), and a command for notifying the main abnormality error that notifies that the game control device 100 (main board, main board) has an abnormality is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024).
.. The effect control device 300 that has received the command for notifying the main abnormality error is the game control device 10.
Notify that there was an abnormality of 0.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 uses the 7-segment display data (“E1” in FIG. 9 (C)) when the game is stopped.
(Error display data) is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 in order to display it on the performance display device 152 (A1025). Then, the on-data of the security signal for notifying the external device (game hall internal management device (hall computer), information collecting terminal, etc.) of the abnormality is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, even when the information regarding the jackpot remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are maintained in the off state. After that, the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated to wait, and the setting change operation (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 1) is performed again.
(Turn on both of 12) and wait for the power to be turned on. While the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated to wait and wait, the interrupt remains disabled (A1001), and the timer interrupt process capable of executing the special figure 1 and 2 game process and the normal figure game process. Since (Fig. 7) cannot be executed, the game (special figure variation display game, normal figure variation display game) cannot be executed.

In this way, the setting change operation (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112)
The process of A1024-A1026 is executed on the assumption that there is an abnormality when the probability setting changing flag is set even though both of the on-operations) are not executed. For example, when the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed), the probability setting changing flag may be set even though the setting change operation has not been executed. is there.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, even when the RAM abnormality flag is set (A102).
The result of 2 is "Y"), the main abnormality error notification command for notifying that there was an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024), and the 7-segment display when the game is stopped. The display data (data of the error display of "E1" in FIG. 9C) is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 (A1025), and the on-data of the security signal is externally output in order to notify the external device of the RAM abnormality. Output to the information terminal 71 (A1026). As described above, even when the information regarding the jackpot remains in the RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are maintained in the off state. Then step A10
The processes of 25 and A1026 are repeated to wait.

When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is “Y”), the game control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (during the variable setting state). First, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1027). When the RAM error flag is set (the result of A1027 is "Y".
”), Since it is unknown whether the probability setting value is correct, the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c is cleared and set to the initial value (for example, the minimum setting value“ 1 ”) (A1028). ), Set the probability setting changing flag indicating that the probability setting is being changed ()
A1029). When the RAM error flag is not set (the result of A1027 is "N"
”), The probability setting changing flag is set without clearing the probability setting value (A1029).
Next, the command for which the probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1).
030), the process proceeds to step A1034. The effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being changed.

In the game control device 100, at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), and the RAM error flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"). ), And when the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1023 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1031). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1031 is "Y"), the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, and the processing during the probability setting confirmation (setting confirmation state) starts, and the probability Set the probability setting confirmation flag indicating that the setting is being confirmed (A1032). Then, the command during the probability setting confirmation is sent to the effect control device 30.
It is transmitted to 0 (effect control board) (A1033), and the process proceeds to step A1034. The effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being confirmed.

After step A1030 or step A1033, the game control device 100 executes the processes of steps A1034 to A1040 as common processes during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation.

First, the game control device 100 saves 128 ms (predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output a security signal during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation (A1034). The count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change / confirmation process (FIG. 8) described later, but remain when the probability setting change or the probability setting confirmation is completed early. The count of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed by the external information editing process (A1321).
The security signal is output for at least 50 ms during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation.

Next, the game control device 100 permits interrupts (A1035). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) can be executed. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1036 is "N"), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1037). If no power failure has occurred (the result of A1037 is “N”), the process returns to step A1036. on the other hand,
If there is a power outage (result of A1037 is "Y"), steps A1055-A10
The process when a power failure occurs in 61 is executed.

In this way, as long as the setting key switch 93 is on and a power failure does not occur, the probability setting value can be confirmed in the variable setting state (setting change state, setting change mode) or the probability setting value can be confirmed. The setting confirmation status (setting confirmation mode) is continued.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036).
The result is "Y"), interrupts are prohibited (A1038), and a command to end the notification is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1039). The effect control device 300 that has received the command to end the notification ends the notification that the probability setting is being confirmed or the notification that the probability setting is being changed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set, that is, whether or not the probability setting is being changed so far (A1040). When the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1040 is "Y"), that is, when the probability setting is being changed so far, the RAM initialization process (described later) in steps A1042-A1044 is executed. To do. On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1040 is "N"), that is, when the probability setting is being confirmed so far, when the power is turned on after step A1045 (when the power is restored). Perform the normal processing of.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is on when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1031 is “N”) (A1041).
.. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (the result of A1041 is "Y"), RA
In M111c, the RAM area other than the probability set value area for storing the probability set value is 0.
Clear (A1042). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0 except for the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area. Further, the above-mentioned probability setting changing flag is also cleared here. Further, in addition to the probability setting value area, a configuration that does not clear the stack area and the unused area, a work area related to the performance information and its display (performance display), and a configuration that does not clear the stack area are also possible. .. The performance information is derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning, for example, the ball output rate, the base value (the ball output rate in the normal game state), the accessory ratio, the number of ejected balls, and the like. is there.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1043). Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1044), and the process proceeds to step A1047.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (A1).
Since the result of 041 is "N") and both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off, the normal power-on (power recovery) process is started and the power failure recovery process is executed (power recovery process). A1045). For example, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery (power recovery) is saved in the area to be initialized. In addition, the above-mentioned probability setting confirmation flag is also cleared here. Next, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1046), and step A10.
It shifts to the process of 47.

The command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044 and the command at the time of recovery from a power failure transmitted in the process of step A1046 include a model designation command indicating the type of the game machine and the hold of special figures 1 and 2. Ornament special figure 1 indicating the number Hold number command and decoration special figure 2 Hold number command, probability information command indicating the presence or absence of a probability state (high probability state or low probability state) or a time saving state, special figure change in a predetermined production mode It includes a production count information command that indicates the number of times the display game has been executed, and a power failure recovery command that indicates that the power has been turned on.

Further, the command at the time of RAM initialization and the command at the time of power failure recovery include a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) indicating setting value information which is information on the probability setting value (setting value) of the game machine 10. Is done. The game control device 100 only needs to transmit the set value information command to the effect control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the effect control device 300 refers to the set value information stored by itself. You can control the production.

The RAM initialization command also includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The effect control device 300 that has received the RAM initialization command is, for example,
A customer waiting demo is displayed on the display device 41, and the sound of the LED and speaker of the board decoration device 46 etc. is used for RAM.
Notification of initialization (RAM clear) is performed for 30 seconds. Further, the command at the time of power failure recovery includes a screen designation command for designating the display contents of the screen of the display device 41. In addition, the command to specify the screen is during normal processing for both special figures 1 and 2 (when neither fluctuating nor hitting).
, It is a customer waiting demo command, otherwise it is a recovery screen command.

After step A1044 or step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, a predetermined register (C) in the random number generation circuit
The CPU 111a sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in the TC update permission register). In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set.

The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) when they are exchanged in a predetermined order and stored as different bit arrangements (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). It is a pattern that determines.

In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of turning on the power, and corresponds to various initial value random numbers (big hit symbol random numbers for determining the jackpot symbol). Initial value (big hit symbol initial value random number), small hit symbol random number that determines the small hit symbol (small hit symbol initial value random number), initial value of the hit random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (win initial value random number) , Save in the predetermined area of RWM as the start value of the initial value of the fall lottery random number used in the fall lottery (fall lottery initial value random number) (A1048), and allow the interruption (A10).
49). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the start value (initial value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the fall lottery random number are configured to be generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. There is. However,
The jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock, and the jackpot symbol random number, hit random number, and fall lottery random number are timer interrupt processing, which is a processing unit of the program. CTC output with the same cycle (CTC for timer interrupt processing (CTC)
It is a "low speed counter" that is updated based on CTC (CTC2)) that is different from CTC0).

In addition, for big hit symbol random numbers, hit symbol random numbers, and fall lottery random numbers, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number goes around. ing. It should be noted that each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or 1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the hit random number, and the fall lottery random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prohibits interrupts (A1051) and executes a performance display editing process for editing performance information and its display (performance display) (A1052). Here, the performance information (such as the accessory ratio and the ball output rate) may be calculated. Further, when the RAM error flag is set in the register, the work area and the stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) may be cleared (if it is not cleared in step A1042). After that, interrupts are permitted (A1053). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) can be executed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1054).
If no power failure has occurred (the result of A1054 is “N”), the process returns to step A1050. As a result, the process of steps A1050-A1054 is repeated until a power failure occurs.

When a power failure occurs (the result of A1054 is "Y"), the game control device 100 starts processing at the time of a power failure, temporarily disables interrupts (A1055), and outputs off-data to all output ports (A1055). 1056). After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1057), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (A).
1058). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off is executed (A1059), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1060).
.. Finally, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1061), and the game waits until the power of the gaming machine is turned off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in the predetermined register (A1302). By switching from register bank 0 used in main processing to register bank 1 at the start of timer interrupt processing, it is equivalent to saving the register used in main processing. When the timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 receives inputs from various sensors and switches and captures signals.
That is, the input process for reading the state of each input port is executed (A1303). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed based on the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag (A1304). When the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A1304 is "Y"), the probability setting change / confirmation process for changing or confirming the probability setting value is executed (A1305).

When the game control device 100 is neither changing the probability setting nor confirming the probability setting (A130).
The result of 4 is “N”), and based on the output data set in various processes, output processing for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (special winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b) is executed (A1306). When a launch prohibition signal is output in the process of step A1005 in the main process, the launch permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the launch permission signal can be set to the permitted state.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process (A1307) that outputs commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, and further, random number update process 1 (A1308) and random number update. Process 2 (A1309) is executed. After that, monitoring of whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower winning opening switch 38a, and the upper winning opening switch 39a, and monitoring of errors. (A1310), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process for performing (whether the front frame or the glass frame is opened, etc.) is executed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not abnormal discharge of the game ball is occurring at the large winning opening (A1311). When the abnormal discharge occurring flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1320) described later, it can be determined that the abnormal discharge is occurring. When abnormal discharge is occurring (the result of A1311 is “Y”), the processes after step A1317 are executed.

The game control device 100 is used when abnormal discharge is not occurring (the result of A1311 is "N").
, The start port switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the start port is executed by the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (A1312). Subsequently, the special figure 1 game process for performing the process related to the special figure 1 variable display game is executed (A1313), and then the special figure 2 game process for performing the process related to the special figure 2 variable display game is executed (A1314). The details of the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a normal map game process that performs a process related to the normal map variation display game (A1315). A segment LED editing process is executed (A1316), which is provided in the game machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents (A1316).

Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether or not there is an abnormality (A1317). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board and determining whether or not there is an abnormality is executed (A1318).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a vibration fraud monitoring process for monitoring fraud due to vibration based on the input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1319). Next, an abnormal discharge monitoring process for monitoring abnormal discharge from the large winning opening is executed (A1320). In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, the special variable winning device 38, 39 has a large winning opening switch 43 (lower winning opening switch 38a, upper winning opening switch 39a), a specific area switch 72 (V winning opening switch), and a remaining ball ejection port. Based on the input from the switch 73, the abnormal discharge of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is monitored, and when the abnormal discharge occurs, the abnormal discharge occurring flag is set. The special variable winning device 3
The game balls that have passed through the large winning opening switches 43 of 8 and 39 are discharged through the specific area switch 72 (V winning opening switch) or the remaining ball ejection port switch 73.

Next, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1321). Then, the performance display monitor control process for controlling the display of the performance display device 152 is executed (A1322). After that, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

When returning the timer interrupt processing, the interrupt disabled state is restored and the register bank specification is automatically restored. However, depending on the CPU used, interrupts are permitted after the external information editing processing. Processing or processing to return the designation of the register bank to register bank 0 may be performed.

[Probability setting change / confirmation process]
Next, the details of the probability setting change / confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation process. In the probability setting change / confirmation process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability set value is within the normal range (A2).
401). The probability setting value here is stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c.

When the probability set value is within the normal range, the game control device 100 (the result of A2401 is "
Y ”), the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A2402), and the data is output to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A2404). When the probability set value is not within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "N"), the extinguishing data is set as the probability set value display data (A2403), and the data is output to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A).
2404).

Here, the probability set value display data is display probability set value data displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability set value display data area. In order to prevent confusion among people involved in the hall, if the probability setting values are different but the same jackpot probability (and small hit probability), the display probability setting value is associated with the jackpot probability (and small hit probability). May be the same. That is, the same display probability setting value may mean the same jackpot probability (and small hit probability).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is 1 set in step A1034.
It is 28 ms (predetermined time). Subsequently, the on-data of the security signal for notifying the external device (game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) of the abnormality is sent to the external information terminal 71.
Is output to (A1026). Here, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the jackpot signal are maintained in the off state.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407). When the flag for changing the probability setting is not set (A2407)
The result of is "N"), that is, when the probability setting is being confirmed, the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated without doing anything.

The game control device 100 is set when the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407).
The result is "Y"), that is, when the probability setting is being changed, it is determined whether or not it is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (A2408). When it is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (the result of A2408 is "Y"), the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated. This is to prevent a situation in which the probability set value is unintentionally updated when the RAM initialization switch 112 is held down.

When the game control device 100 is not the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (A240).
The result of 8 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not there is an input of the RAM initialization switch 112 (A2).
409). When there is no input from the RAM initialization switch (the result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change / confirmation process ends.

The game control device 100 receives the input of the RAM initialization switch 112 (A2409).
The result is "Y"), the work setting value in the work setting value area (in RAM111c or register) is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 5, and the probability of the probability setting value area corresponding to the work setting value. The set values 1 to 6 are updated by +1 (A2410). As a result, the RAM initialization switch 112
Each time is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by 1. After that, the probability setting change / confirmation process is terminated. In the work setting value area (in RAM111c or register) for storing the work setting value when the setting change mode is entered, a value corresponding to the probability setting value read from the probability setting value area (1 from the probability setting value). The subtracted value) may be stored.

In the above, every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is directly updated in response to the update of the work setting value, but the work setting value of the RAM 111c is updated. The probability setting value (work setting value) during the setting change is stored in the area, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change work is completed (the result of A1036 is "Y".
”), The value corresponding to the work setting value in the work setting value area may be stored in the probability setting value area for the first time. By doing this, if a power failure occurs during the setting change (A1037)
It is possible to prevent a situation in which the probability setting value (probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area) used for game control, effect control, etc. is changed to an unintended value in the result of "Y").

[Display example on performance display device]
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a display example of the performance display device 152. The performance display device 152 is a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot Dp) display, and each digit of the performance display device 152 is an 8-segment a, b, c, d, e, It consists of f, g and Dp.

In the example of FIG. 9A, while the probability setting is being changed, the digit 1 to the digit 3 are lit with "SET" to indicate that the setting is being changed. On the other hand, RA while changing the probability setting
Corresponding to the work setting values 0 to 5 that are switched each time the M initialization switch 112 is operated, in digit 0, the display probability setting value is switched to, for example, "1" to "6" and is lit and displayed.

In the example of FIG. 9B, when the probability setting value is not within the normal range and is abnormal (the result of A2401 is “N”), the extinguishing data is set as the probability setting value display data (A2403), and the digit 0. Turns off. In the digits 1 to 3, the display of "SET" indicating that the setting is being changed is not turned off.

In the example of FIG. 9C, when the RAM is abnormal when the power is turned on (the result of A1022 is "Y".
”) Or when the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed) (A)
The result of 1023 is "Y"), and the 7-segment display data error display "E1" when the game is stopped is digit 1.
It is lit and displayed at 2 (A1024).

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (A1312) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a starting port 1 winning monitoring table (A2701) for monitoring the winning of the first starting winning opening 36 (starting port 1), and acquires a hard random number as a jackpot random number. Is executed (A2702). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a start opening prize in the first start winning opening 36 (A2703). And if there is no starting opening prize (A
The result of 2703 is "N"), and the process proceeds to step A2709.

The game control device 100 has a start opening prize in the first start winning opening 36 (A2703).
The result of is "Y"), whether or not the probability of occurrence of a big hit is a low probability state and no time reduction (state without general electric support), that is, special figure low probability & no time reduction medium (normal game) It is determined whether or not it is (in the state) (A2704). If the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special figure low probability & no time reduction is in progress (during the normal game state). Then, in the case of a low probability state and a state without time reduction (the result of A2704 is "Y"".
), That is, in the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step A2707.

When the game control device 100 is in a state where the probability of occurrence of a jackpot is not in a low probability state (when it is in a high probability state) or when it is in a state where there is a time reduction (a state where there is general electric support) (the result of A2704 is "N") A right-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and an effect command setting process is executed (A2706). As a result, the effect control device 300 displays the right-handed instruction display for instructing right-handed as a warning when the first starter winning opening 36 receives a right-handed winning in the special figure high probability state or the time saving state. Can be displayed on. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table (A2707) for setting the information of holding by winning the first start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1), and executes the special figure start opening switch common process (A2708). ).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 is a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2).
Start port 2 for monitoring the winning of a prize 2 A winning monitoring table is prepared (A2709), and a hard random number acquisition process for acquiring a hard random number as a jackpot random number is executed (A2710). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a start opening prize in the normal variable winning device 37 (A2711). If there is no start port winning (the result of A2711 is "N"), the start port switch monitoring process ends.

In the game control device 100, when there is a start opening prize in the normal variable winning device 37 (A271).
The result of 1 is "Y"), and it is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is operating (during normal electric operation) (A2712). When the normal variable winning device 37 is not operating (the result of A2712 is "
N ”), it is determined whether or not fraud (Public train fraud) against the normal variable winning device 37 is occurring (A2713). When the number of fraudulent prizes to the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraud occurrence determinations (for example, 5 or more), it can be determined that a general electric fraud is occurring. Ordinary variable winning device 37
When the fraud is occurring (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.

When the game control device 100 is not fraudulent with respect to the normal variable winning device 37 (A2)
The result of 713 is "N"), a table for setting the information of the hold by winning the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) is prepared (A2714), and the special figure starting port switch common processing is executed (A).
2715), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.

When the game control device 100 is fraudulent against the normal variable winning device 37 (A2)
The result of 712 is "Y"), the process of steps A2713 is not executed, and the processes of steps A2714 and A2715 are executed.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process, the special figure start port switch common process (A270)
8. Details of A2715) will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a procedure for common processing of the special figure start port switch. Special figure Start port switch common processing is start port 1 switch 36
This is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

First, the game control device 100 outputs information regarding the number of winnings to the monitoring target start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the external management device of the game machine 10. The start port signal output number of times is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output number of times overflows (A2903). If the number of outputs does not overflow (the result of A2903 is "N")
Save the updated value in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (A2904), and step A.
The process proceeds to 2905. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (the result of A2903 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2905. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, in the game control device 100, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, whether or not the number of special figure reservations (start memory number) to be updated corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value. (A2905). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure start port switch common processing ends. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) is updated by +1. Then (A2906), the target start opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2702 in the RWM jackpot random number. Save to the area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

After that, the game control device 100 extracts and prepares a fall lottery random number for drawing a fall from a high probability state to a low probability state of the jackpot probability of the special figure (A2912), and stores the fall lottery random number. Save to the area (A2913).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) has been won (A2914). If the winning device is not winning the normal variable winning device 37 (the result of A2914 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2917. On the other hand, in the case of winning the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A2914 is "Y"), the small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (A).
2915), save in the small hit symbol random number storage area of RWM (A2916).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A2917), and executes the special figure reservation information determination process (A2).
918). Then, the start port switch to be monitored and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared as the effect command (A2919), and the effect command setting process (A292) is prepared.
Execute 0) to end the special figure start port switch common process. The decoration special figure hold number command is
The start port 1 switch 36a is a decorative special figure 1 hold number command, and the start port 2 switch 37a
Then, it is a decoration special figure 2 hold number command.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning opening 36 and the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the execution right of the variable display game. It serves as a start storage means for storing up to a predetermined number as start memory. Also,
The start storage means (game control device 100) stores various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first start winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as the first starting memory up to a predetermined number. , Various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
Next, the special figure hold information determination process (A2918) in the above-mentioned special figure start port switch common process.
) Will be described in detail. 12A and 12B are flowcharts showing the procedures of the first half and the second half of the special figure reservation information determination process (pre-reading process, pre-determination process). The special figure reservation information determination process is executed for the special figure 1 and 2 start memory generated based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in a big hit (during a special game state) (A3001). When the jackpot is in progress (the result of A3001 is "Y"), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. When it is not a big hit (the result of A3001 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the player has won the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A3002). The look-ahead process (pre-judgment process) is executed when the starting port 1 is won (the result of A3002 is "Y"), that is, when the first starting winning opening 36 (starting port 1) is won. To do step A3004
Move to the subsequent processing.

When the game control device 100 does not win the starting port 1 (the result of A3002 is "N"),
Whether or not the jackpot occurrence probability is in a low probability state and there is no time reduction (state without normal electric support), that is, whether or not there is a special figure low probability & no time reduction (normal game state) judge(
A3003). When the special figure low probability & no time reduction is in progress (the result of A3003 is "Y"), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. That is, the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) in the normal game state.
In the case of winning a prize, the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated without executing the look-ahead process (preliminary determination process). In the normal game state, as will be described later, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game often fluctuates for a long time (long fluctuation) and is forcibly terminated due to an outlier result. Do not execute.

When the game control device 100 is not in the special figure low probability & time saving (the result of A3003 is "
N "), that is, in the case of winning the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) in a state other than the normal gaming state (time saving state or probable change state), in order to execute the look-ahead process (pre-determination process), step A3004. Move to the subsequent processing.

Then, the game control device 100 starts a look-ahead process (pre-determination process), and determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a jackpot is in a high probability state, that is, whether or not it is in a special figure high probability (A3004).
). When the special figure high probability flag (in this embodiment, the special figure high probability & the time saving flag) is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special figure high probability is in progress. When the special figure is in high probability (the result of A3004 is "Y"), it is determined whether the fall lottery random number prepared in step A2912 is within the judgment value range of the fall winning (A3005), and the look-ahead fall lottery corresponding to the judgment result is determined. An information command is prepared as an effect command (A3006), and an effect command setting process is performed (A3007). Next, the game control device 100 prepares a low probability determination flag for performing a look-ahead jackpot determination in a low probability state (A3008). When the special figure is not in high probability (A3)
Since the result of 004 is “N”) and there is no fall from the high-probability state to the low-probability state, the pre-reading process for the fall is shifted to the process of step A3008 without executing (A3005-A3007).

After that, the game control device 100 executes the look-ahead jackpot determination process described later based on the jackpot random number prepared in step A2909 (A3009), and determines whether or not the determination result of the look-ahead jackpot determination process is a jackpot (A3010). ). When the judgment result is a big hit (A3)
The result of 010 is "Y"), the target start port switch (start port 1 switch 36a or start port 2)
Set the jackpot symbol random number check table corresponding to the switch 37a) (A3011),
Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number (A3012), and step A3.
The process proceeds to 019.

In the game control device 100, when the determination result of the look-ahead jackpot determination process is out of order (A3).
The result of 010 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the prize is won in the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) (A3013). When the starting port 2 is won (the result of A3013 is "Y"),
Since a small hit can occur in the special figure 2 variable display game executed by winning a prize in the starting port 2, a small hit determination process described later is executed as a look-ahead process related to the small hit (A3014).
The determination result of the small hit determination process determines whether or not the small hit is a small hit (A3015). Then, when the determination result is a small hit (the result of A3015 is "Y"), the small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3016), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared small hit symbol random number is acquired (). A3017), the process proceeds to step A3019.

When the game control device 100 does not win a prize in the starting port 2 (the result of A3013 is "N").
, Special figure 1 Since a small hit cannot be generated in the variable display game, the stop symbol information of the loss is set (A3018). That is, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stop symbol information of the deviation is set. Also, when the judgment result is not a small hit by winning the starting port 2 (A3)
When the result of 015 is "N"), that is, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stop symbol information of the deviation is set (A3018). After that, the process proceeds to step A3019.

After steps A3012, A3017, and A3018, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol information in the symbol information area (A3019). The stop symbol information in the symbol information area is also used in the variation pattern setting process (A3038) described later. Then, a pre-reading stop symbol command (low probability) for low probability corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared as an effect command (A3020), and the effect command setting process is executed (A3021).
).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a high-probability determination flag for performing a look-ahead jackpot determination in a high-probability state (A3022), and similarly to A3009-A3018, A3023-A3.
The process of 032 is executed. First, the look-ahead jackpot determination process described later is executed (A3023).
The determination result of the look-ahead jackpot determination process determines whether or not it is a jackpot (A3024). When the judgment result is a big hit (the result of A3024 is "Y"), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch (start port 1 switch 36a or start port 2 switch 37a) is set (A3025). , The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (A3026), and the process proceeds to step A3033.

In the game control device 100, when the determination result of the look-ahead jackpot determination process is out of order (A3).
It is determined whether or not the result of 024 is "N"), and whether or not the prize is won in the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2) (A3027). If the starting port 2 is a prize (the result of A3027 is "Y"),
Since a small hit can occur in the special figure 2 variable display game executed by winning a prize in the starting port 2, a small hit determination process described later is executed as a look-ahead process related to the small hit (A3028).
The determination result of the small hit determination process determines whether or not it is a small hit (A3029). Then, when the determination result is a small hit (the result of A3029 is "Y"), the small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3030), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared small hit symbol random number is acquired ( A3031), the process proceeds to step A3033.

When the game control device 100 does not win a prize in the starting port 2 (the result of A3027 is "N").
, Special figure 1 Since a small hit cannot be generated in the variable display game, the stop symbol information of the loss is set (A3032). That is, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stop symbol information of the deviation is set. Also, when the judgment result is not a small hit by winning the starting port 2 (A3)
When the result of 029 is "N"), that is, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stop symbol information of the deviation is set (A3032). After that, the process proceeds to step A3033.

After steps A3026, A3031, and A3032, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure is in high probability (A3033). When the special figure is in high probability (A3033)
Result is "Y"), overwrite the stop symbol information and save it in the symbol information area (A3034),
The process proceeds to step A3035. The stop symbol information in the symbol information area is also used in the variation pattern setting process (A3038) described later. When the special figure is not in high probability (A30)
The result of 33 is "N"), and step A without overwriting the stop symbol information in the symbol information area.
The process proceeds to 3035.

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a pre-reading stop symbol command (high probability) for high probability corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information as an effect command (A3035).
, The effect command setting process is executed (A3036).

Subsequently, the special figure information setting process for setting the special figure information, which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern, is executed (A3037), and the variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is executed as a look-ahead. (A3038). Then, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number indicating the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared as an effect command (A3039), the effect command setting process is executed (A3040), and the special figure hold information determination process is performed. finish.

The effect control device 300 receives both the look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) and the look-ahead stop symbol command (high probability), but if the jackpot probability at the time of receiving is a low probability state, the look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) (Low probability) is used to execute look-ahead symbol command processing (Fig. 51), and if the jackpot probability when received is in a high probability state, the look-ahead symbol command (high probability) is used to perform look-ahead symbol command processing. (FIG. 51) may be executed.

[Look-ahead jackpot judgment processing]
Next, the look-ahead jackpot determination process (A3009, A3023) in the special figure hold information determination process
) Will be described in detail. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the look-ahead jackpot determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value (A3101), and determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3102). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

In the game control device 100, when the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A310).
The result of 2 is “Y”), a deviation (other than a big hit) is set as a judgment result (A3107), and the look-ahead big hit judgment process is completed.

Further, the game control device 100 determines that the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (A3).
The result of 102 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the determination flag is a high probability determination flag (A3).
103). Then, when the determination flag is a high probability determination flag (the result of A3103 is "Y"), the upper limit determination value in the high probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A3104). On the other hand, when the judgment flag is not a high probability judgment flag (when it is a low probability judgment flag), (A3).
The result of 103 is "N"), and the upper limit judgment value in the low probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A3).
105).

When the upper limit determination value of the value of the jackpot random number is set, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A3106). When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A3106 is "Y"), a deviation (other than the jackpot) is set as the determination result (A3107). On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (
The result of A3106 is "N"), and a big hit is set as the determination result (A3108). When the judgment result is set, the look-ahead jackpot judgment process ends.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 game processing (A1313) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 game processing.

The game control device 100 first indicates that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted.
It is determined whether or not the game interruption flag is set (A3201).

When the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted is not set (the result of A3201 is "N"), the game control device 100 is a big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game. It is determined whether or not the player is in the state or the small hit state (A3202). Special Figure 2 When neither the big hit state nor the small hit state of the variable display game (the result of A3202 is "N")
The large winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3203). In the big prize opening switch monitoring process,
The detection of the game ball is monitored by the lower large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Then, the specific area switch specific area switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the specific area switch 72 is executed (A3204).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (
Only 1 is subtracted) (A3205). Special figure 1 The game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Special Figure 2 When the big hit or small hit state of the variable display game is in progress (the result of A3202 is "Y"), steps A3203 and A32
The process of step A3205 is performed without performing the process of 04. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (A3206). Special figure 1 When the game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3206 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A3217.

The game control device 100 has a special figure 1 when the game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3206 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or has already been up.
A special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the game process number is set in the register (A3207). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired by using the special figure 1 game sequence branch table (A3).
208). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 1 game processing number, and the game branch processing according to the special figure 1 game processing number is executed (A3209).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A3209, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
Special figure 1 Monitors the fluctuation start of the variable display game, and sets the variable start of the special figure 1 variable display game, the effect setting, and the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 variable processing. 1 Normally, the process is executed (A3210). The details of the special drawing 1 normal processing will be described later in FIG.

When the game processing number is "1" in step A3209, the game control device 100 has
The special figure 1 changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure 1 and setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display processing is executed (A3211). The details of the processing during the change in FIG. 1 will be described later in FIG. 35.

When the game processing number is "2" in step A3209, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
Special Figure 1 If the game result of the variable display game is a big hit, set the big hit fanfare command according to the type of big hit, set the fanfare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern of each big hit, and set the fanfare / interval processing. The special figure 1 display processing for setting the information necessary for the operation is executed (A3212). The details of the processing during display of Special FIG. 1 will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

When the game processing number is "3" in step A3209, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
The fanfare / interval processing is executed to set the opening time of the large winning opening, update the number of opening times, set the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the large winning opening, and the like (A3213). The details of the fanfare / interval processing will be described later in FIG. 39.

When the game processing number is "4" in step A3209, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
If the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the ending command is set, and the information necessary for processing the remaining ball of the jackpot is set. The middle process is executed (A3214).

When the game processing number is "5" in step A3209, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
The process of setting the interval time and the ending time, the process of setting the information necessary for performing the jackpot end process, and the like are executed (A3215).

When the game processing number is "6" in step A3209, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
Special Figure 2 Game weight time value (described later) is set, Special Figure 1 sets information necessary for executing normal processing, etc. Special Figure 1 Big hit end processing is executed (A3216). Special figure 1
Details of the jackpot end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

When the processing based on the special figure 1 game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (A3217), and then displays the special figure 1. The symbol variation control process related to the device 51 is executed (A3218), and the lever solenoid 86
The lever solenoid control process for controlling b is executed (A3219), and the special figure 1 game process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted is set (the result of A3201 is "Y"), the game control device 100 is set to step A32.
Special figure 1 for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 without performing the processing of 02 to A3216.
After preparing the fluctuation control table (A3217), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the special figure 1 display 51 is executed (A3218), the lever solenoid control process for controlling the lever solenoid 86b is executed (A3219), and the special figure 1 End the game process. In this way, when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the time counting (update) of the variable time timer (special figure 1 game processing timer) that measures the variable time is stopped. It should be noted that, by the symbol variation control process, the variation of the special symbol itself may apparently continue on the special diagram 1 display 51.

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 game processing (A1314) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. 15A and 15B are flowcharts showing the procedures of the first half and the second half of the special figure 2 game processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is in the jackpot state (A3301). Special Figure 1 When the variable display game is not in the jackpot state (the result of A3301 is “N”), the jackpot switch monitoring process is executed (A3302). In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball in the lower large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Monitor detection. Then, the specific area switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the specific area switch 72 is executed (A3303).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (
Only 1 is subtracted) (A3304). Special figure 2 The game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0.

When the game control device 100 is in the jackpot state of the special figure 1 variable display game (A3301).
The result of is "Y"), step A33 without performing the processing of steps A3302 and A3303
The process of 04 is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3305). Special figure 2 When the game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3305 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A3323.

In the game control device 100, when the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3305 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the special figure 2
It is determined whether or not the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is 0 (A3306). Special figure 2 When the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A3306 is "N")
The number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (A3307), and the timer value for length variation (for example, 60000 msec (60 seconds)) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (for example, 60000 msec (60 seconds)).
A3308). As will be described later, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game has a long fluctuation and the fluctuation time is long (for example, 10 minutes), the timer for the fluctuation time cannot be set with 2 bytes. Therefore, steps A3306-A3308 A timer with a long fluctuation time for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is prepared by repeating the counting of the timer value for long fluctuations for the number of repetitions by the process of.

In the game control device 100, when the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3305 is “Y”) and the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3306 is “Y”). , The special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing number is set in the register (A3309). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired by using the special figure 2 game sequence branch table (A3310). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 2 game processing number, and the game branching processing according to the special figure 2 game processing number is executed (A3311).

When the game processing number is "0" in step A3311, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
Special figure 2 Monitors the fluctuation start of the variable display game, and sets the variable start of the special figure 2 variable display game, the effect setting, and the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 variable processing. 2 Normal processing is executed (A3312). The details of the special drawing 2 normal processing will be described later in FIG.

When the game processing number is "1" in step A3311, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
The special figure 2 changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure 2 and setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display process is executed (A3313). The details of the processing during fluctuation in FIG. 2 will be described later in FIG.

When the game processing number is "2" in step A3311, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
Special Figure 2 If the game result of the variable display game is a big hit, set the big hit fanfare command according to the type of big hit, set the fanfare time according to the big winning opening opening pattern of each big hit, and set the fanfare / interval processing. Special Figure 2 Displaying processing for setting information necessary for performing is executed (A3314). The details of the processing during display of Special Figure 2 will be described later in FIG. 38.

When the game processing number is "3" in step A3311, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
The fanfare / interval processing is executed to set the opening time of the large winning opening, update the number of opening times, set the information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the large winning opening, and the like (A3315). The fanfare / interval processing is common to that executed in the special figure 1 game processing, and the details will be described later in FIG. 39.

When the game processing number is "4" in step A3311, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
If the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the ending command is set, and the information necessary for processing the remaining ball of the jackpot is set. The middle process is executed (A3316).

When the game processing number is "5" in step A3311, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
The process of setting the interval time and the ending time, the process of setting the information necessary for performing the jackpot end process, and the like are executed (A3317).

When the game processing number is "6" in step A3311, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
Special Figure 2 Executes Special Figure 2 jackpot end processing for setting information necessary for executing normal processing (A3318). The details of the special figure 2 jackpot end processing will be described later in FIG. 41.

When the game processing number is "7" in step A3311, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
The small hit fanfare processing is executed (A3319), in which the opening time of the large winning opening is set, the number of times of opening is updated, and the information necessary for performing the small hit medium processing is set. The details of the small hit fanfare process will be described later in FIG. 45.

When the game processing number is "8" in step A3311, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
The process of setting the small hit end command, the process of setting the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process, and the like are executed (A3320).

When the game processing number is "9" in step A3311, the game control device 100 has a game control device 100.
A small hit remaining ball process for setting an ending time, setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 small hit end process, and the like is executed (A3321).

When the game processing number is "10" in step A3311, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 small hit end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure 2 normal process. (A3322). The details of the special figure 2 small hit end processing will be described later in FIG.

When the processing based on the special figure 2 game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A3323), and then displays the special figure 2. The symbol variation control process related to the device 52 is executed (A3324), and the lever solenoid 86
The lever solenoid control process for controlling b is executed (A3325), and the special figure 2 game process is completed.

[Special figure 1 Normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 normal processing (A3210) in the special figure 1 game processing will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special drawing 1 normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game can start variation (A3401). If the special figure 1 fluctuation display game cannot start fluctuation (when the fluctuation start is not possible) (the result of A3401 is "N"), the special figure 1 normal processing number "0" is set as the special figure 1 game processing number. (A3416), save in the special figure 1 game processing number area of RWM (A3417). Here, from the end of the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 2 variation display game (during processing during the special figure 2 display) to the end of the jackpot operation (special figure 2 jackpot end processing), and in the special figure 2 variation display game. From the end of the small hit fluctuation (during the processing during the display of the special figure 2) to the end of the small hit operation (the end processing of the special figure 2 small hit), it is said that the special figure 1 variation display game cannot start the fluctuation.

In the game control device 100, when the special figure 1 variation display game can start variation (A3401).
The result of is "Y"), and it is determined whether or not the left-handed instruction has been notified (A3402). If the left-handed instruction notification command has already been prepared as the effect command and transmitted to the effect control device 300, it can be determined that the left-handed instruction notification has been completed. When the left-handed instruction has been notified (A34)
The result of 02 is "Y"), and the process proceeds to step A3406.

When the left-handed instruction notification has not been notified based on the left-handed instruction notification flag (the result of A3402 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares the left-handed instruction notification command as an effect command (A3403), and sets the effect command. (A3404), and set the left-handed instruction notification flag indicating that the left-handed instruction is notified (displayed) on the display device 41 or the like (A340).
5).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of holdings in Special Figure 1 is 0 (A3406).
.. When the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (the result of A3406 is "Y"), the special figure 1 normal processing number "0" is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area of the RWM (A3402). As a result, the special figure 1 normal processing is repeated until the special figure 1 hold number becomes 1 or more.

In the game control device 100, when the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is not 0 (the result of A3406 is "N"),
A fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the presence or absence of the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or the time saving state is prepared as an effect command (A3407), and the effect command setting process is executed (A3408). Subsequently, the special figure 1 variation start process for starting the special figure 1 variation display game is executed (A3409). After that, a decorative special figure hold number command (decorative special figure 1 hold number command) corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared as an effect command (A3410), and the effect command setting process is executed (A3411).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a remaining game count command corresponding to the time shortening fluctuation number, which is the number of remaining special figure fluctuation display games in the time saving state, as an effect command (A34).
12), the effect command setting process is executed (A3413). The effect control device 300 that has received the remaining game count command can grasp the time reduction fluctuation count.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the information during the change of the special figure 1 in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3414). Here, the information of the special figure 1 changing or (the special figure 1 changing + the special figure 2 changing) is set in the special figure status area. Next, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, which is the process for shifting to the special figure 1 changing process, is executed (
A3415). In the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, for example, the process number "1" is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area.

[Special figure 2 Normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 normal processing (A3312) in the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special drawing 2 normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game can start variation (A3501). If the special figure 2 fluctuation display game cannot start fluctuation (when the fluctuation start is not possible) (the result of A3501 is "N"), the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" is set as the special figure 2 game processing number. (A3518), save in the special figure 2 game processing number area of RWM (A3519). Here, the special figure 2 variation display game fluctuates from the end of the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 variation display game (during processing during special figure 1 display) to the end of the jackpot operation (special figure 1 jackpot end processing). It is said that it cannot be started.

In the game control device 100, when the special figure 2 variation display game can start varying (A3501).
The result is "Y"), and it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0 (A3502). Special figure 2 When the number of holdings is not 0 (the result of A3502 is "N"), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the presence or absence of the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or the time saving state is prepared as an effect command. Then (A3503), the effect command setting process is executed (A3504). Then, special figure 2
Special Figure 2 for starting the variation display game The variation start process is executed (A3505).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure hold number command (decorative special figure 2 hold number command) corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number as an effect command (A3506), and executes the effect command setting process (A3506). A3507). After that, the game control device 100 prepares a remaining game count command corresponding to the time reduction fluctuation number, which is the number of remaining special figure fluctuation display games in the time saving state, as an effect command (A3508), and executes the effect command setting process. (A3509
). The effect control device 300 that has received the remaining game count command can grasp the time reduction fluctuation count.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the information during the change of the special figure 2 in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3510). Here, the information of the special figure 2 changing or (the special figure 1 changing + the special figure 2 changing) is set in the special figure status area. Next, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process, which is the process for shifting to the special figure 2 changing process, is executed (
A3511). In the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process, for example, the process number "1" is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area.

In the game control device 100, when the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0 (the result of A3502 is “Y”),
It is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (A3512). Special figure 1 When the number of pending numbers is 0 (
It is determined whether or not the result of A3512 is “Y”) and the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) (A3513). When special figure 1 is not changing (the result of A3513 is "N"
), It is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (A3514). If the customer waiting demo has not started (the result of A3514 is "N"), set the customer waiting demo in progress flag (A3515).
..

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state as an effect command (A3516), and executes the effect command setting process (A3517).
The effect control device 300 that has received the customer waiting demo command can execute the customer waiting demo on the display device 41. After that, the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (A).
3518), save in the special figure 2 game processing number area of RWM (A3519). As a result, the special figure 2 normal processing is repeated until the special figure 2 hold number becomes 1.

On the other hand, if the number of special figures 1 held is not 0 (the result of A3512 is "N"), the special figure 1 variable display game will be executed. Therefore, the special figure 2 without preparing the customer waiting demo command, etc. As the game processing number, the special figure 2 normal processing number "0" is set (A3518), and the game is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM (A3519). In addition, when special figure 1 is changing (A35)
If the result of 13 is "Y") or if the customer waiting demo has already started (the result of A3514 is "Y").
”), Without preparing a customer waiting demo command, etc., the special figure 2 normal processing number“ 0 ”is set as the special figure 2 game processing number (A3518), and the special figure 2 game processing number area of the RWM is set. Save (A3519).

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3409) in the special figure 1 normal process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special drawing 1 fluctuation start processing.

The game control device 100 first sets the special figure 1 information setting flag (A3601a).
The special figure 1 information setting flag is used for setting fluctuation information (including distribution of look-ahead fluctuation patterns). Next, a random number is loaded from the special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for the number of hold 1), prepared (A3602a), and the special figure 1 fall lottery random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (A3603a). , The fall lottery process described later is executed (A3604a). The number of hold numbers 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory having the earliest digestion order (here, the earliest in the special figure 1).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the jackpot flag 1 setting process for setting the jackpot flag 1 deviation information and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is a jackpot (
A3605a), special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A) related to setting of special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information)
3606a), the special figure 1 information setting process (A3607a) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is executed.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (A3608a). ). Subsequently, the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (A3609a) for setting the variation pattern which is the variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the special figure 1 variation display game (A3609a). A3610a) is executed. Then, the time reduction fluctuation number update process for updating the time reduction fluctuation number is executed (A3).
611a).

Next, the game control device 100 has a processing number of "1" in order to shift to the special figure 1 changing processing.
(A3612a), and save the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A3).
613a). Subsequently, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (A3614a), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation of special figure 1 (on-data of the signal during change of special symbol 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A3615a).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the changing flag in the variation control flag area of FIG. 1 (A3616a). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 100 msec) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the indicator 51 of the special figure 1) is saved in the blinking control timer area of the special figure 1 (A3617).
a), the initial value of the changing symbol number (for example, 0 indicating a non-lighting symbol) is saved in the special figure 1 changing symbol number area (A3618a), and the special figure 1 variation start process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (A3505) in the special figure 2 normal processing will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a procedure of special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing.

In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the "big hit flag 1" in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (FIG. 18) is replaced with the "big hit flag 2", and the "special figure 1" is replaced with the "special figure 2". Since the same processing as that of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that steps A3601b-A3618b in the special figure 2 variation start process correspond to steps A3601a-A3618a in the special figure 1 variation start process, respectively.

[Fall lottery process]
Next, the fall lottery process (A3604) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 change start process.
The details of a and A3604b) will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fall lottery process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a jackpot is in a high probability state (probability variation state), that is, whether or not it is in a special figure high probability (A3701). When the special figure is not in high probability (the result of A3701 is "N"), the fall lottery process is terminated.

In the game control device 100, when the special figure is in high probability (the result of A3701 is "Y"), the value of the fall lottery random number of the target (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is less than the fall lottery lower limit determination value. Whether or not it is determined (A3702). When it is less than the lower limit judgment value of the fall lottery (the result of A3702 is "Y".
”), The fall lottery process is completed. When it is equal to or more than the fall lottery lower limit determination value (the result of A3702 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the value of the target fall lottery random number is larger than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (A3703). When it is larger than the fall lottery upper limit judgment value (the result of A3703 is "Y")
, End the fall lottery process.

When the game control device 100 is equal to or less than the fall lottery upper limit determination value (the result of A3703 is "N").
), Since the value of the target fall lottery random number is between the fall lottery upper limit judgment value and the fall lottery lower limit judgment value, the processing at the time of winning the fall lottery is started, and first, the signal regarding the high probability end is sent to the RWM. Save to the external information output data area (A3704). Here, the signal regarding the high probability end is
The off data (off signal) of 2 jackpot signals and the off data (off signal) of 4 jackpot signals. As a result, the signal regarding the high probability end is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and thus to the external device (hall computer or the like).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of high probability & time saving in the test signal output data area (A3705). The signals related to the end of high probability & time saving are, for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal off data, special symbol 2 high probability state signal off data, special symbol 1
The off-data of the fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the off-data of the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the left-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (A3706). Then, a number without a time reduction is saved in the game status display number area of the RWM (A3707). The special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area of the RWM (A3708), and the fall lottery process is completed. The special figure low probability & no time reduction flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low and there is no time reduction state (normal game state).

As described above, in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the fall lottery is executed at the start of each special figure variation display game, and when the fall lottery is won, the probabilistic state (high probability state) is changed to the normal game state (low). The fall process (A3704-A3708) that falls to the probabilistic state) is executed.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3605a) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

First, the game control device 100 saves the deviation information in the jackpot flag 1 area of the RWM (A3801). Subsequently, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of RWM (A3802). The number of hold numbers 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory having the earliest digestion order (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). After that, the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for 1 hold number) is cleared to 0 (A3803).
..

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (A3804). Jackpot flag 2
Is not a big hit (the result of A3804 is "N"), based on the obtained big hit random number value
Special Figure 1 Executes the jackpot determination process to determine whether the variable display game is a jackpot (A38).
05), it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a big hit (A3806). When the result of the determination is a big hit (the result of A3806 is "Y"), the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A3801 is overwritten and saved (A3807), and the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed. finish. Note that the jackpot flag 1 can be a jackpot only when the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area), so that it is possible to avoid that the jackpot flag 1 and the jackpot flag 2 are jackpots at the same time. ..

In the game control device 100, when the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (the result of A3804 is "Y".
”) Or, if the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A3806 is“ N ”), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3605b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the small hit flag 2 area of the RWM (
A3901), the RWM jackpot flag 2 area is saved (A3902).
Next, load the jackpot random number from the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for 1 hold number) of RWM, and load it.
Prepare (A3903). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). After that, the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for 1 hold number) is cleared to 0 (A3904).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (A3905). Jackpot flag 1
Is not a big hit (the result of A3905 is "N"), based on the obtained big hit random number value
Special Figure 2 The jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the variable display game is a jackpot is executed (A39).
06), it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a big hit (A3907). When the result of the determination is a big hit (the result of A3907 is "Y"), the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A3902 is overwritten with the big hit information and saved (A3908), and the big hit flag 2 setting process is performed. finish. Note that the jackpot flag 2 can be a jackpot only when the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area), so that it is possible to avoid that the jackpot flag 1 and the jackpot flag 2 are jackpots at the same time. ..

In the game control device 100, when the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (the result of A3905 is "Y".
”) Or, if the judgment result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A3907 is“ N ”), whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit based on the acquired big hit random number value. A small hit determination process for determining whether or not the game is a small hit is executed (A3909), and the result of the determination is determined whether or not the game is a small hit (A3910). In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number value is also used for the small hit determination (in other words, the same random number value is used for the small hit determination and the jackpot determination). Special figure 2
If the variable display game is a small hit (the result of A3910 is "Y"), step A3901
The small hit flag 2 area where the loss information was saved is overwritten and saved (A).
3911), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is completed. When the special figure 2 variation display game is not a small hit (the result of A3910 is “N”), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated without saving the small hit information in the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment process]
Next, the jackpot determination process in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process, etc. (
Details of A3805 and A3906) will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot determination process. The jackpot determination process is a process common to the jackpot determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value (A4001), and determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A4002). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

In the game control device 100, when the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A400).
The result of 2 is "Y"), a deviation (other than a big hit) is set as a judgment result (A4007), and the big hit judgment process is completed.

Further, the game control device 100 determines that the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (A4).
The result of 002 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the special figure is in high probability (A4003). Then, when the special figure is in high probability (the result of A4003 is "Y"), the upper limit determination value in high probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A4004). On the other hand, if the special figure is not in high probability (A)
The result of 4003 is "N"), and the upper limit judgment value in the low probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A).
4005).

When the upper limit determination value of the value of the jackpot random number is set, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (A4006). When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A4006 is "Y"), a deviation (other than the jackpot) is set as the determination result (A4007). On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (
The result of A4006 is "N"), and a big hit is set as the judgment result (A4008). When the judgment result is set, the jackpot judgment process ends.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the small hit determination process (A3909) in the large hit flag 2 setting process and the like will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A4101). Note that a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. When it is equal to or less than the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit.

As a matter of course, in order to avoid that the result of the same special figure variation display game is a small hit and a big hit, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) is the above-mentioned big hit judgment. It does not overlap the range of values (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In this embodiment,
A small hit random number is not provided independently, and a large hit random number is used for determining a small hit, but a configuration in which an original small hit random number is provided is also possible.

In the game control device 100, when the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A).
The result of 4101 is "Y"), a deviation is set as the determination result (A4103), and the small hit determination process is completed.

Further, in the game control device 100, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A4101 is "N"), whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value. (A4102). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (A)
The result of 4102 is "Y"), and the result of the determination is set to be off (A4103). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (the result of A4102 is "N"), the small hit is set as the determination result (A4104). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends.

[Big hit probability, small hit probability, fall probability]
25 (a), (b), and (c) are special figure variation display games determined as a result of the above-mentioned big hit determination process (FIG. 23), small hit determination process (FIG. 24), and fall lottery process (FIG. 20). It is a table exemplifying the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, and the fall probability of.

In the example of FIG. 25A, the jackpot probability (high probability state) in the high probability state is the probability setting value 1 to 1.
It is the same regardless of 6 (settings 1 to 6). On the other hand, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (low probability state)
Has a tendency to increase as the probability set value increases (becomes a higher setting), and the larger the probability set value, the more likely it is that a big hit will occur, which is advantageous to the player. As described above, only one of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the high probability state may be configured to increase as the probability setting value increases. The jackpot probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value in FIG. 23 by the range of the value of the jackpot random number. The jackpot probability can be changed according to the probability setting value by changing the range of the lower limit determination value or the value of the jackpot random number corresponding to the probability setting value in addition to the upper limit determination value.

Also, with setting 1 and setting 2, with setting 3 and setting 4, or with setting 5 and setting 6, the jackpot probability (
The high probability state) and the jackpot probability (low probability state) are the same. In addition, the jackpot probabilities may be different from each other in all settings. Further, even if the jackpot probabilities are the same, the effect control device 300 can execute the effect according to each probability set value (variable effect setting process described later).

In the example of FIG. 25B, the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether it is in the high probability state or the low probability state, and regardless of the probability setting value (setting). The small hit probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the small hit upper limit determination value and the small hit lower limit determination value in FIG. 24 by the range of the value of the large hit random number. As shown in FIG. 14, in the special figure 1 variable display game, small hits do not occur (small hit probability is zero). It should be noted that a configuration in which a small hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game is also possible.

In the example of FIG. 25 (c), the fall probability as the winning probability of the fall lottery is a probability setting value (setting).
Regardless of whether it is a high-probability state or a low-probability state, and whether it is a special figure 1 variable display game or a special figure 2 variable display game, it is constant (1/237). is there. The fall probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the fall lottery upper limit determination value and the fall lottery lower limit determination value in FIG. 20 by the range of the fall lottery random numbers.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3606a) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (A4201). Jackpot flag 1
Is a big hit (the result of A4201 is "Y"), the big hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (A4202). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (A4203), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area of the RWM (A4204). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A42).
05), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4206). The stop symbol pattern is a special figure display (here, special figure 1 display 5).
This is for setting the stop symbol in 1) and the stop symbol in the display device 41. Then, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4207). The time reduction determination data includes information on whether or not there is a time reduction state (with or without time reduction) after the end of the big hit, and is used in the special figure 1 big hit end process and the special figure 2 big hit end process described later.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area of the RWM (A4208), and wins a large prize corresponding to the stop symbol number. The mouth opening information is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 large winning mouth opening information area of RWM (A4209). After that, the process proceeds to step A4212. This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (the result of A4201 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (A4210).
), The detached stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4211). After that, the process proceeds to step A4212.

After steps A4209 and A4211, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decorative special figure 1 command as an effect command in the decorative special figure 1 command area (A4212). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes the effect command setting process (A4213). As a result, the decorative special figure 1 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4214), and clears the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) to 0 (A4215). ). After that, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3606b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (A4301). Jackpot flag 2
Is a big hit (the result of A4301 is "Y"), the big hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (A4302). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (A4303), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area of the RWM (A4304). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table (A43).
05), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4306). The stop symbol pattern is a special figure display (here, special figure 2 display 5).
This is for setting the stop symbol in 2) and the stop symbol in the display device 41. Then, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4307). The time reduction determination data includes information on whether or not there is a time reduction state (with or without time reduction) after the end of the big hit, and is used in the special figure 1 big hit end process and the special figure 2 big hit end process described later.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area of the RWM (A4308), and wins a large prize corresponding to the stop symbol number. The mouth opening information is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 large winning mouth opening information area of RWM (A4309). After that, the process proceeds to step A4317. This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A4301 is "N"), whether or not the small hit flag 2 is a small hit, that is, the small hit information is displayed in the small hit flag 2 area. It is determined whether or not the game has been saved (A4310). When the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (the result of A4310 is "Y"), the small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (A4311). Next, set the special figure 1 small hit symbol table (A)
4312), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (A4313). This process selects the type of specific result.
Subsequently, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4314). After that, the process proceeds to step A4317.

In the game control device 100, when the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (the result of A4310 is "N".
”), The stop symbol number at the time of detachment is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (A4315), and the detached stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4316). After that, the process proceeds to step A4317.

After steps A4309, A4314, and A4316, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decorative special figure 2 command as an effect command in the decorative special figure 2 command area (A4317). ). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes the effect command setting process (A4318). The decorative special figure 2 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4319), and clears the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) to 0 (A4320). ), Clear the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) to 0 (A4)
321). After that, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is completed.

In this way, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start winning opening 36, and detects the game ball with the normal variable winning device 37. 2 As a variable display game based on the above, the variable display game execution means for executing the variable display game. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control means that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Example of special figure jackpot symbol distribution]
FIG. 28 is a table illustrating the distribution of the types of jackpots (big hit symbol distribution) of the special figures 1 and 2 variable display games controlled by the above-mentioned special figure 1 stop symbol setting process and special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. Is. It should be noted that the distribution of the type of jackpot is common to each setting (each probability setting value).

FIG. 28 exemplifies a table that defines the types of jackpots corresponding to the jackpot stop symbol numbers acquired in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process and their distribution rates. In the example of FIG. 28, the type of jackpot is common to the special figures 1 and 2 variable display games, and the 10R probability variable jackpot and 4R
There is a probabilistic big hit, 10R normal big hit (time reduction 100 times). In addition, a 10R normal big hit (time reduction number 0 times) may be provided.

The 10R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 10R normal jackpot (100 times of time reduction) are distributed at 30%, 30%, and 40% in the special figure 1 variable display game, and in the special figure 2 variable display game. It differs by 50%, 10%, and 40%. The distribution rate can be changed as appropriate.

[Special Figure 1 Information Setting Process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 information setting process (A3607a) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 information setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets a variation pattern selection information table (A4401).
). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 1 are acquired (A4402).

Here, the first half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation, and the second half offset data (variation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for distributing the second half fluctuation. The first half fluctuation is a fluctuation mode before the start of reach,
The latter half variation is a variation mode after the reach state is reached, and corresponds to the type of reach (normal reach, special reach, etc., including no reach).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A4403), and when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A4403 is "N"). ), The value is converted by adding the special figure 1 hold number to the first half offset data in order to distribute the first half fluctuation according to the special figure 1 hold number (A4404). Then, the process proceeds to step A4405.

In the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A4403).
The result is “Y”), the process of step A4404 is not performed, and the process proceeds to step A4405 without updating or converting the first half offset data acquired in step A4402.

Then, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4405), and saves the second half offset data (variation distribution information 2).
) Is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area of the RWM (A4406), and the special figure 1 information setting process is completed.

[Special figure 2 information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 information setting process (A3607b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a jackpot is a low probability state and a state without time reduction (a state without normal electric support), that is, a special figure low probability & no time reduction (normal game). It is determined whether or not (in the state) (A4501). Special figure Low probability & No time saving (A)
The result of 4501 is “Y”), and the process proceeds to step A4505.

When the game control device 100 is not in the special figure low probability & time saving (A4501 result is "N"
”), That is, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation display game to be started from now on is the time reduction final variation in the case of the time saving state or the probability variation state (A4502). The time-shortening final variation is a final (for example, 100th) special figure variation display game in a time-saving state. When the special figure variation display game to be started from now on is the time reduction final variation (the result of A4502 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A4506.

The game control device 100 sets the variation pattern selection information table when the special figure variation display game to be started is not the time-saving final variation (the result of A4502 is “N”).
4503). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 2 are acquired (A4504). As described above, the first half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation, and the second half offset data (variation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for distributing the second half fluctuation. ..

On the other hand, when the special figure low probability & no time reduction is in progress (the result of A4501 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure variation display game to be started is a high probability final variation. (A4505). Here, the high-probability final variation is a special figure variation display game when the player wins the fall lottery (FIG. 20) and falls from the probabilistic state (high probability state) to the normal gaming state (low probability state).

The game control device 100 determines when the special figure variation display game to be started is a high-probability final variation (the result of A4505 is "Y") or when the time-reduced final variation is (A450).
2), the first half offset data and the second half offset data for the final fluctuation are set (A4506) in order to secure the time for notifying that the final fluctuation is, and the process proceeds to step A4511. ..

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit when the special figure variation display game to be started is not a high-probability final variation (the result of A4505 is "N") (the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is "N"). A4507). Special Figure 2 When the result of the variable display game is not a big hit (A450
The result of 7 is "N"), the first half offset data for the missed / small hit of the special figure 2 at the time of low probability is set (A4508), and the process proceeds to step A4510. When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A4507 is “Y”), the first half offset data for the big hit of special figure 2 at the time of low probability is set (A4509). Subsequently, the latter half offset data for long-term fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set (A4510). As a result, in the normal game state, the special figure 2 variation display game becomes a long-term variation (long variation).

In addition, in the probability variation state (special figure high probability state) and the time saving state, since the latter half offset data for the long-term variation of the special figure 2 variation display game is not set, the special figure 2 variation display game has a normal variation time variation (special figure 2 variation display game). (Short fluctuation compared to long fluctuation). As a result, in the probability variation state (special figure high probability state) and the time saving state, the small hit RUSH (rush) state in which small hits frequently occur due to the special figure 2 variation display game becomes possible.

After step A4504, A4506 or A4510, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) in the variable distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A451).
1), the latter half offset data (variable distribution information 2) is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area of the RWM (A4512), and the special figure 2 information setting process is completed.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3609a) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets a variable group address table (A4601a).
), Obtain and prepare the address of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 (
A4602a), the variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the special figure 1 (A4603a).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of order (A4604a). Special Figure 1 When the result of the variable display game is out of order (A4604)
The result of a is "Y"), and 2-byte distribution processing based on the variation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4).
In 605a), if the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is not out of place (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) (the result of A4604a is "N"), the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4606a). The 2-byte distribution process and the distribution process are processes for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure 1 variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The structure of the latter half variable group table is different for hit and miss, and the random numbers for distribution are 1 byte size for hit and 2 byte size for miss. The hit size is set to 1 byte size to save data capacity, but 1 byte is sufficient because the appearance rate of the hit in the special figure 1 variable display game itself is low. In the case of a hit (in the case of a big hit or a small hit), only the lower value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is used.

After step A4605a or A4606a, the game control device 100 acquires and prepares the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution (A4607a). Subsequently, the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the special figure 1 (A4608a), and the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 2 is executed (A4609a). .. Then, the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variable number area (A4610a). The distribution process here is a process for selecting the second half variation number (second half variation pattern) of the special figure 1 variation display game from the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half variable group table (A4611a), and then
The table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the latter half fluctuation number (A4612a).
.. Subsequently, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4613a). Further, the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared as a random number from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the special figure 1 (A4614a), and the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 3 is executed (A4615a). The distribution process here is a process for selecting the first half variation number (first half variation pattern) of the special figure 1 variation display game from the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 3. is there.

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution, and obtains the first half variation number.
Save in the first half variation number area (A4616a), and end the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process.

By the above processing, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of the game, from a plurality of of them.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3609b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process.

The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process is the same as the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process, in which "special figure 1" in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (FIG. 31) is replaced with "special figure 2". Therefore, detailed description will be omitted. Note that steps A4601b-A4616b in the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process correspond to steps A4601a-A4616a in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process, respectively.

By the above processing, the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of the game, from a plurality of of them.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the fluctuation start information setting processing (A3) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing.
The details of 610a and A3610b) will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first clears the random number storage area (for the reserved ball 1) of the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 used in the special figure 1 (A5001).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation time value table (A5002) and acquires the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number (A5003). Furthermore, the second half fluctuation time value table is set (A5004), and the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is acquired (
A5005).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A500).
6), the added value is saved in the target special figure game processing timer area (A5007). continue,
Special Figure 1 It is determined whether or not information is being set for the variable display game (A5008). Special Figure 1 When information is not being set for the variable display game (the result of A5008 is "N"), Special Figure 2
Since information is being set for the variable display game, it is determined whether or not to start the long variation (long-term variation) of the special figure 2 variable display game (A5009).

When the game control device 100 does not start the long variation of the special figure 2 variation display game (A5009)
The result of is "N"), and 0 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A50).
10) When starting the long variation of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A5009 is "Y")
Special figure 2 Save 9 in the repeat count area of the game processing timer (A5011). In the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 game processing timer, the fluctuation time (for example, 10 minutes), which is not enough for the 2-byte timer, is changed. Therefore, the predetermined number of repetitions (here, 9) of the special figure 2 game processing timer is the number of repetitions. Set in the area. In timer interrupt processing with an interrupt cycle of 4 msec (milliseconds), a 2-byte timer can be set up to about 262 seconds.

For example, by saving the above added value in the special figure game processing timer area, 60,000 ms.
When the ec (60 seconds) timer is set and the number of repetitions of 9 times is saved,
The timer is subtracted by the timer interrupt processing (particularly, special figure 2 game processing (FIG. 15)) (A3).
304), when the time is up (the result of A3305 is "Y"), the number of repetitions is subtracted by 1 (A3307), and the long variation timer value of 60000 ms (60 seconds) is set again in the game processing timer (A3308). ). As a result, the special figure 2 variation display game of long variation,
It is possible to set a long fluctuation time of 60,000 msec + (60,000 msec × 9) = 10 minutes.

The fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game when the fluctuation is not long (number of repetitions = 0) are the first half fluctuations saved in the special figure game processing timer area in step A5007. It is the sum of the time value and the latter half fluctuation time value.

When the game control device 100 is setting information regarding the special figure 1 variable display game (A50).
The result of 08 is "Y"), step A5012 without setting the number of timer repetitions.
Move to.

After steps A5008, A5010, and A5011, the game control device 100 prepares a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number (A5012), and prepares a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number (A5013). .. Then, the effect command setting process for transmitting the variable command as the effect command is executed (A5014).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the number of special figure reservations (the number of special figure 1 hold or the number of special figure 2 hold) of the target of the special figure change display game to be started by -1 (A5015), and changes the target special figure. Shift the contents of the random number storage area related to the display game (A5016) and clear the free area after the shift (A5016).
A5017). Then, the fluctuation start information setting process is terminated.

By the above processing, information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is,
The game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random value values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorative special figure variable display Set detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure variation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holds), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure variation display game. Variable commands including information about the pattern are mentioned, and these commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Time reduction fluctuation frequency update processing]
Next, the details of the time reduction fluctuation number update process (A3611a, A3611b) will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the time reduction fluctuation number update process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure is in the high probability (in the probability change state) (
A5101). When the special figure high probability flag (in this embodiment, the special figure high probability & the time saving flag) is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special figure high probability is in progress.
When the special figure has a high probability (the result of A5101 is “Y”), the time reduction fluctuation number update process is terminated.

When the game control device 100 is not in the special figure high probability (the result of A5101 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure time reduction is in progress (time reduction state) (A5102). When the special figure game mode flag area is set with the special figure time reduction flag (in this embodiment, the special figure low probability & time reduction flag), it can be determined that the special figure time reduction is in progress. If the special figure time reduction is not in progress (the result of A5102 is "N"), the time reduction variation number update process is terminated.

The game control device 100 updates the number of time reduction fluctuations by -1 (subtracts only 1) when the special figure time is shortened (the special figure has a low probability and the normal electric support is provided) (the result of A5102 is "Y"). )
(A5103). The initial value of the time reduction fluctuation number is the number of fluctuations in which the time saving state is maintained after the end of the jackpot, and is set to, for example, 100 (the jackpot end setting process 2 described later).
.. Further, regardless of whether the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game starts to fluctuate, the time reduction number of fluctuations is updated by -1.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of time reduction fluctuations is 0 (A5).
104). When the number of time reduction fluctuations is not 0 (the result of A5104 is "N"), that is,
If the time saving state continues at the start of the next special figure variation display game, the game control device 100 ends the time shortening variation number update process. When the number of time reduction fluctuations is 0 (A5104)
The result is “Y”), and the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the end of the time saving in the external information output data area (A5105). Here, the signal relating to the time saving end is off-data of two jackpot signals. As a result, the signal regarding the end of the time reduction is used as external information in the external information terminal 71.
As a result, it is output to an external device (such as a hall computer).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the time reduction end in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5106). The signals related to the end of the time reduction here are, for example, off-data of the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, off-data of the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and so on.
The off-data of the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the off-data of the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the number in the low probability in the game state display number area (A).
5107), save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area of RWM (A5108), and save the normal figure time saving flag in the normal figure game mode flag area (A).
5109), the time reduction fluctuation number update process is terminated.

In this way, by executing the time reduction fluctuation number update process in the second embodiment, the normal gaming state (special figure low probability and normal) is appropriately changed from the time saving state (special figure low probability and state with normal electric support). It is possible to shift to the state without electric support).

[Special Figure 1 Processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 variable processing (A3211) in the special figure 1 game processing will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing during the change in Special FIG.

First, the game control device 100 updates the number of symbol determination output times by +1 (A5301).
The symbol confirmation count output count is used in the symbol confirmation count signal editing process (part of the external information editing process) that outputs the symbol confirmation count signal generated when the stop symbol of the special symbol variation display game is fixed to an external device. Will be done. Next, the decoration special figure 1 command is loaded from the decoration special figure 1 command area and prepared as an effect command (A5302), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5).
303). After that, the decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5304), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5).
305).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 as
The display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 1 is set (A5306). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 6 if the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol of special figure 1.
00 msec, 2000 msec for the jackpot symbol of Special Figure 1.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is out of order (A5307). If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of order (the result of A5307 is "Y"), the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of loss) is stored in the special figure 1 stop symbol. Load from the save area and save in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5)
322).

In the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not out of order (in the case of a big hit) (the result of A5307 is "N"), the special figure 2 is also changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is also running).
It is determined whether or not (A5308). If the special figure 2 is not changing (the result of A5308 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A5319. When special figure 2 is also changing (A53)
The result of 08 is "Y"), and it is determined whether or not the processing being displayed in Special Figure 2 described later is being executed (A5).
309).

When the game control device 100 is executing the process being displayed in Special Figure 2 (the result of A5309 is "
Y ”), the process proceeds to step A5311. Special figure 2 Displaying When processing is not being executed (
The result of A5309 is "N"), and the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by +1 (A5310). Subsequently, as the display time of the special figure 2, the display time of a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of the special figure 1 (display time of the special figure 1 + 4 msec) is set (A5311) and displayed in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. Save time (A5312). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of timer interrupt processing. The reason why 4 msec is added is that the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (subtracted by 4 msec corresponding to the interrupt cycle) in the next special figure 2 game processing (A3304), so that it is added extra. As a result, the actual display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 and the display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 can be made the same. If the stop display of Special Figure 2 has already started, the display time will be reset here (basically, the display time will be extended, but in some cases it may be shortened).

Next, the game control device 100 sets and prepares the out-of-order symbol command of the decoration special figure 2 as an effect command (A5313), saves it in the decoration special figure 2 command area (A5314), and executes the effect command setting process (A5314). A5315). Subsequently, the decorative special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5316), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5317). After that, the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 for setting to execute the special figure 2 display process is executed (A5318). In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, the process number "2" is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area, or
Special Figure 2 The process of stopping the variable display game with the result of being missed is executed.

By the processing of steps A5311 to A5318, the deviation result of the special figure 2 variable display game (including the decorative special figure 2 variable display game) is set in the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the control related to the special figure 1 variable display game. , Execution of processing during special figure 2 display (end of special figure 2 variable display game)
Is set. In this way, even if the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (during the change of special figure 2), if the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a hit result (big hit), the special figure 2 variable display game is missed. As a result, the fluctuation will be forcibly terminated (forced termination).

The special figure 1 changing process is performed at the end of the variable time, that is, when the special figure 1 game processing timer (value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area set in step A5007) is timed up (A3206). Since the result is executed in "Y"), when the special figure 1 variable display game of the hit result stops changing, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly terminated (forced termination).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decorative special figure 1 command from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5319). Next, the round number upper limit value information is loaded from the above-mentioned special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area, saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A5320), and large from the above-mentioned special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area. The winning opening opening information is loaded and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (A5321). After that, the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5322). Next, the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (A5323) for setting to execute the special figure 1 display process is executed, and the special figure 1 variable process is terminated. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, the special figure 1 is being displayed, such as saving the process number "2" in the special figure 1 game process number area or executing a process of stopping the special figure 1 variable display game. Perform the processing required to move to processing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting a stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. In addition, the game control device 100 is executing the special figure 2 variation display game (during the change of special figure 2).
Even so, when the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a hit result, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly terminated with a missed result.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 variable processing (A3313) in the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing during the change in Special FIG.

First, the game control device 100 updates the number of symbol determination output times by +1 (A5401).
The symbol confirmation count output count is used in the symbol confirmation count signal editing process (part of the external information editing process) that outputs the symbol confirmation count signal generated when the stop symbol of the variable display game is fixed to an external device. .. Next, the decorative special figure 2 command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area, prepared as an effect command (A5402), and the effect command setting process is executed (A540).
3). After that, the decorative special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5404), and the effect command setting process is executed (A540).
5).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 as
The display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 2 is set (A5406). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 6 if the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol of special figure 2.
It is 00 msec, 600 msec for the big hit symbol of special figure 2, and 136 msec for the small hit symbol of special figure 2. The display time of the out-of-order symbol and the big hit symbol of the special figure 2 is the same, but it is longer than the display time of the small hit symbol of the special figure 2.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is out of order (A5407). If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order (the result of A5407 is "Y"), the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of loss) is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol. Load from the save area and save in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5)
427).

In the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not out of order (A5407).
The result is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is also changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed) (A5408). If the special figure 1 is not changing (the result of A5408 is “N”), the process proceeds to the process of step A5423. When special figure 1 is also changing (the result of A5408 is "Y"
”), It is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (A5409).

The game control device 100 is used when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (A540).
When the result of 9 is "N"), that is, a small hit, the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (
A5412), the decorative special figure 1 interruption command is prepared as an effect command (A5413), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5414). After that, the process proceeds to step A5423. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (during the change of the special figure 1), when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a small hit, the special figure 1 variable display game becomes the special figure 1 game. It is interrupted by interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation time by the processing timer. In this case, the derivation of the result of the special figure 1 variable display game (display of the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number) is postponed, and the special figure 1 that has been interrupted after the small hit operation related to the special figure 2 variable display game is completed. You can restart the variable display game.

The game control device 100 is used when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (A540).
The result of 9 is "Y"), and it is determined whether or not the processing being displayed in Special Figure 1 described later is being executed (A54).
10). When the process being displayed in Special Figure 1 is being executed (the result of A5410 is “Y”), the process proceeds to the process of step A5415. When the special figure 1 display processing is not being executed (the result of A5410 is “N”), the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by +1 (A5411). Subsequently, as the display time of special figure 1, a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of special figure 2 (display time of special figure 2 + 4 mse).
The display time of c) is set (A5415), and the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A5416). Here, 4 msec is an interrupt cycle (predetermined time cycle) of timer interrupt processing. The reason for adding 4 msec is that the special figure 1 game processing timer is updated by -1 (subtracting only 4 msec corresponding to the interrupt cycle) in the next special figure 1 game processing (A3205).
), It is an extra addition. As a result, the actual display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 and the display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 can be made the same. If the stop display of Special Figure 1 has already started, the display time will be reset here (basically, the display time will be extended, but in some cases it may be shortened).

Next, the game control device 100 sets and prepares the out-of-order symbol command of the decoration special figure 1 as an effect command (A5417), saves it in the decoration special figure 1 command area (A5418), and executes the effect command setting process (A5418). A5419). Subsequently, the decorative special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5420), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5421). After that, the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 for setting to execute the special figure 1 display process is executed (A5422). In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, the process number "2" is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area, or
Special Figure 1 The process of stopping the variable display game with the result of being missed is executed.

By the processing of steps A5415 to A5422, the deviation result of the special figure 1 variable display game (including the decorative special figure 1 variable display game) is set in the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the control related to the special figure 2 variable display game. , Execution of processing during special figure 1 display (end of special figure 1 variable display game)
Is set. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (during the change of special figure 1), if the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit, the special figure 1 variable display game is forced with an off result. The fluctuation ends (execution ends).

The special figure 2 changing process is performed at the end of the variable time, that is, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 and the special figure 2 game processing timer times up (results of A3305 and A3306). Is executed in "Y"), so that when the special figure 2 variable display game of the hit result stops changing, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly terminated (executed).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decorative special figure 2 command from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5423). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (A5424). Special Figure 2 When the result of the variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5424 is "Y"), the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of small hit) is displayed in special figure 2. Load from the stop symbol save area and save in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5427).

When the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a small hit (when the result is a big hit) (the result of A5424 is "N"), the game control device 100 has the above-mentioned special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area to the round number upper limit. Load the value information and save it in the round number upper limit information area (A5425).
The large winning opening opening information is loaded from the above-mentioned special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (A5426). After that, the information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5427). Next, the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (A5428), which makes settings for executing the special figure 2 display process, is executed (A5428), and the special figure 2 variable process is terminated. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, the process number "2" is set in the special figure 2 game process number area.
The processing necessary for shifting to the processing during display of the special figure 2, such as saving the game and executing the process of stopping the special figure 2 variable display game, is performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means (display time setting means) for setting a stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. In addition, the game control device 100 is executing the special figure 1 variation display game (during the change of special figure 1).
Even so, when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a hit result, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly terminated with a missed result.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 display process (A3212) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process during display of the special figure 1.

First, the game control device 100 starts from the jackpot flag 1 area to the jackpot flag 1 (big hit information,
Alternatively, (indicating the loss information) is loaded (A5701), and the jackpot flag 1 area is cleared (A5702). Subsequently, based on the jackpot flag 1, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a jackpot (A5703).

In the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A5703).
The result is "Y"), and the signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5704). For example, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 big hit is the on-data of the condition device operating signal and the on-data of the special symbol 1 hit signal.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the hit symbol command from the hit symbol command area, prepares it as an effect command (A5705), and executes the effect command setting process (A57).
06). Since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, this hit symbol command corresponds to the big hit symbol. Subsequently, the jackpot fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5707), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5708).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the signal corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the probability state in the external information output data area (A5709). The signal here includes on-data (on-signal) of two jackpot signals and on-data (on-signal) of three jackpot signals. In the present embodiment, it is irrelevant because the 2R jackpot does not exist, but the jackpot 2 signal may be turned off by the 2R probability variation jackpot in the low probability, and the jackpot 3 signal is turned off by the 2R probability variation jackpot in the high probability. You may.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the jackpot opening information (A5710), and saves the jackpot fanfare time in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A5711).

Next, the game control device 100 sets "3" as the processing number in order to shift to the fanfare / in-interval processing (A5712), saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A5713), and fanfares. / Executes process transition setting process during interval (
A5714), special figure 1 display processing is terminated.

In the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing, the processing for shifting to the fanfare / interval processing is executed. Specifically, as signals related to the start of the jackpot, on-data (on-signal) of one jackpot signal and on-data (on-signal) of four jackpot signals are saved in the external information output data area. In addition, the signal related to the end of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area, and the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. Further, the time reduction fluctuation number region for holding the time reduction fluctuation number is cleared. Also, clear the number of rounds area to 0.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit) (the result of A5703 is "N"), that is, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is If it is out of alignment, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game executed this time has a high probability final variation (A5715). The high-probability final fluctuation is a special figure fluctuation display game when the fall lottery (FIG. 20) is won. If it is not a high-probability final variation (the result of A5715 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game executed this time is a time-saving final variation (A5716). The time-saving final variation is the final (for example, 100th) special figure variation display game in the time-saving state. When it is not the time reduction final fluctuation (the result of A5716 is "N"),
The process proceeds to step A5724.

The game control device 100 has a probability information command (low) indicating a low probability when the final variation has a high probability (the result of A5715 is “Y”) or when the final variation has a shortened time (the result of A5716 is “Y”). Probability) is prepared as an effect command (A5717), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5718). Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A5719), and the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared (A5720).
After that, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is in a small hit state (A5721). Special Figure 2 When the variable display game is in a small hit state (the result of A5721 is "Y"), step A5
It shifts to the process of 724.

When the game control device 100 is not in the small hit state of the special figure 2 variation display game (the result of A5721 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the left-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (A5).
722). Subsequently, the second game status display unit 56 (ramp D8) that notifies that it is a right-handed hit.
In order to turn off −D10), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game status display number 2 area (A5723), and the special figure 1 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (A5).
724). After that, since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of order, "0" is set as the processing number of the special figure 1 normal processing in order to shift to the special figure 1 normal processing, and the special figure 1 game processing number area is set. Save the processing number (A5725). Then, the processing during display of special figure 1 is terminated.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 display process (A3314) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. 38A and 38B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the process during display of the special figure 2. FIG. 38A shows the first half portion of the special drawing 2 display processing, and FIG. 38B shows the second half portion of the special drawing 2 display processing.

First, the game control device 100 starts from the small hit flag 2 area to the small hit flag 2 (small hit information,
Alternatively, (indicating the loss information) is loaded (A5801), and the small hit flag 2 area is cleared (A5802). Then, from the jackpot flag 2 area to the jackpot flag 2 (big hit information or jackpot information, or
Load (A5803) to load (A5) and clear the jackpot flag 2 area (A5).
804). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit based on the big hit flag 2 (A5805).

In the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (A5805).
The result is "Y"), and the signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5806). For example, the signal relating to the start of the special symbol 2 big hit is the on-data of the condition device operating signal and the on-data of the special symbol 2 hit signal.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the hit symbol command from the hit symbol command area, prepares it as an effect command (A5807), and executes the effect command setting process (A58).
08). Since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, this hit symbol command corresponds to the big hit symbol. Subsequently, the jackpot fanfare command is prepared as an effect command (A5809), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5810).

After that, the game control device 100 saves the signal corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the probability state in the external information output data area (A5811). The signal here includes on-data of 2 jackpot signals and on-data of 3 jackpot signals. In this embodiment, the 2R jackpot does not exist, so it is irrelevant, but the jackpot 2 signal may be turned off by the 2R probability variation jackpot in the low probability, and the jackpot 3 signal is turned off by the 2R probability variation jackpot in the high probability. You may.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the jackpot opening information (A5812), and saves the jackpot fanfare time in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A5813). Then, "3" is set as the processing number in order to shift to the fanfare / in-interval processing (A5814).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A5).
815), execute the fanfare / process transition setting process during the interval (A5816),
Special Figure 2 Displaying Processing ends. The fanfare / inter-interval processing transition setting processing is the same as that executed in the processing being displayed in Special Figure 1.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a big hit (A5).
The result of 805 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit (whether or not the small hit flag 2 is a small hit) based on the small hit flag 2 (whether or not the small hit flag 2 is a small hit). A5817). When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5817 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game executed this time has a high probability final fluctuation (A5818). If it is not a high-probability final variation (the result of A5818 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is a time-saving final variation (A5819). When the time reduction is not the final variation (the result of A5819 is “N”), the processing of steps A5820 to A5823 is not performed, and the process proceeds to the processing of step A5824.

The game control device 100 determines that the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time has a high probability final variation (the result of A5818 is "Y") or the time reduction final variation (the result of A5819 is "Y"). ”), A probability information command (low probability) indicating a low probability is prepared as an effect command (A5822), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5821).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery of the RWM (A5822), and clears the left-handed instruction notification flag (A58).
23). After that, the hit symbol command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared as an effect command (A5824), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5825). In addition, it should be noted
Since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, this hit symbol command corresponds to the small hit symbol.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit fanfare command as an effect command (A5826), and executes the effect command setting process (A5827). Then, the signal related to the right-handed strike instruction (on-data of the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5828), and the second game state display unit 56 (ramp D) that notifies that the right-handed strike is in effect.
In order to turn on 8-D10), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5829).

Next, in the game control device 100, in the present embodiment, the lower prize opening is opened by a small hit, so that
Clear the lower prize opening fraudulent prize number area (A5830), save the fraudulent monitoring period out-of-period flag in the lower grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A5831), and execute the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process. (A5832), the process of displaying special figure 2 is terminated. Although the big winning opening is opened by a small hit, the screen of the display device 41 does not have to be changed.

In the special figure 2 small hit fanfare medium processing transition setting process, a process for shifting to the special figure 2 small hit fanfare medium processing is executed. Specifically, "7" is set as the processing number in order to shift to the processing during the small hit fanfare, and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Further, the small hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area, and the signal related to the start of the small hit (on-data of one big hit signal) is saved in the external information output data area. Further, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 small hit (on-data of the special symbol 2 small hit signal) is saved in the test signal output data area, and the small hit medium information is saved in the special figure status area.

On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is not a small hit (when the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit) (the result of A5817 is “N”), that is, the special figure 2 variation display game. If the result of is out of order, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time has a high probability final variation (A5833). If it is not a high-probability final variation (the result of A5833 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is a time-saving final variation (A5834). When the time reduction is not the final variation (the result of A5834 is “N”), the processing of steps A5835 to A5839 is not performed, and the process proceeds to the processing of step A5840.

The game control device 100 has a probability information command (the result of A5833 is "Y") or the probability information command (the result of A5834 is "Y") when it is the final variation with high probability (the result of A5833 is "Y").
(Low probability) is prepared as an effect command (A5835), and the effect command setting process is executed (A5836). Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A5837), and the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (A5838).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 notifies the second game state display unit 5 that it is a right-handed hit.
In order to turn off 6 (lamps D8-D10), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5839), and the special figure 2 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction). (A5840). After that, since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order, "0" is set as the processing number of the special figure 2 normal processing in order to shift to the special figure 2 normal processing, and the special figure 1
The processing number is saved in the game processing number area (A5841). Then, the processing during display of special figure 2 is terminated.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (A3213, A3315) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. 39A and 39B are flowcharts showing the procedure of fanfare / interval processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the remaining ball counter that counts the remaining balls of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is 0 (A6001). When the remaining ball counter is not 0 (the result of A6001 is "N"), the fanfare / interval processing is terminated.
When the remaining sphere counter is 0 (the result of A6001 is "Y"). It is determined whether or not it is the first big hit round (A6002). If it is not the first jackpot round (A600)
The result of 2 is “N”), and the process proceeds to step A6010.

When the game control device 100 is the first jackpot round (the result of A6002 is "Y".
”), It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed at the normal drawing start gate 34 (A6003). When the game ball does not pass through the normal drawing start gate 34 (the result of A6003 is "N"), the fanfare / interval processing is terminated. That is, right-handed strike is started and the normal drawing start gate 34
Until the game ball passes through, it does not shift to the processing related to the big hit (processing while the big winning opening is open, etc.).

The game control device 100 is used when a game ball has passed at the start gate 34 (A600).
When the result of 3 is "Y"), that is, when the right-handed hit is started, the setting of the information regarding the start of the jackpot is executed (A6004-A6009). First, set the round number upper limit table (
A6004), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the round number upper limit value information area is acquired from the round number upper limit value table, and saved in the round number upper limit value area of RWM (A6005). In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds is 10R and 4R.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 acquires the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the round number upper limit value information area from the round number upper limit value table, and saves it in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A6006). Then, in the present embodiment, since the upper prize opening is opened by the big hit, the upper prize entrance illegal winning number area is cleared (A6007), and R
WM's top prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area saves the flag outside the fraud monitoring period (A600)
8), the on-output data of the signal during operation of the accessory continuous operation device is saved in the test signal output data area (A6009).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the number of rounds in the number of rounds area by +1 (A601).
0). Since the number of rounds in the number of rounds region is cleared to 0 in the fanfare / in-interval processing transition setting processing, it is 0 before the start of the big hit operation this time.
After that, the large winning opening opening information and the round command corresponding to the number of rounds are prepared as the effect command (A6011), and the effect command setting process is executed (A6012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the initial value of the jackpot processing control pointer corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the number of rounds (A6013), and saves the game in the jackpot processing control pointer area of the RWM (A6014). Here, in the case of a pattern in which the opening and closing of the large winning opening is repeated during one round, 0 is set as the initial value, and in the case of a pattern in which the large winning opening is opened only once in one round, the initial value is suddenly the upper limit. Set the value (= 21). In the case of a pattern in which opening and closing is repeated, the initial value may not be 0, but may be larger than 0 and less than the upper limit (that is,).
Start with a value in the middle). Next, the large winning opening opening information and the large winning opening opening time corresponding to the number of rounds are set (A6015).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a lever solenoid operation round that operates the lever solenoid 86b that opens the specific area 86 (V winning opening) (A60).
16). In the present embodiment, the lever solenoid operation round is the jackpot round 1 (the first jackpot round).

The game control device 100 sets the operation data of the lever solenoid 86b (A6017) when the lever solenoid operation round is performed (the result of A6016 is “Y”). Here, the lever solenoid opens the specific area 86 in a long time in the case of a probability variation jackpot (10R or 4R probability variation jackpot) and in a short time (very short time) in the case of a normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot). The operation data of 86b is set. Specifically, data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area, and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared to 0. On the other hand, when it is not the lever solenoid operation round (the result of A6016 is "N"), the stop data of the lever solenoid is set (A6018).

Next, the game control device 100 has a processing number of "" in order to shift to the processing during the opening of the large winning opening.
4 ”is set (A6019), and it is determined whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure 1 variable display game (A6019).
A6020). Special figure 1 When it is a big hit of a variable display game (the result of A6020 is "Y")
, This processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6021), and the large winning opening opening time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A6022). If it is not a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6020 is "N"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6023), and the big winning opening opening time is set to the special figure 2 game processing timer. Save to the area (A6024).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal (on-data of the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 1) regarding the start of opening of the upper prize opening in the test signal output data area (A6025), and outputs the solenoid of the winning opening of the RWM. Turn on the upper prize opening solenoid 39b (large winning opening solenoid 2) in the data area. Save the upper prize opening on data (A6026), clear the number of big winning openings count (A6027), and process during fanfare / interval. To finish.

In the present embodiment, there is only a big hit that opens only the upper big winning opening, but two types of a big hit that opens only the upper big winning opening and a big hit that opens only the lower big winning opening may be provided.
It is also possible to provide a jackpot that opens both the upper and lower prize openings.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 jackpot end process (A3216) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 jackpot end processing.

The game control device 100 first executes a subroutine call based on the time reduction determination data (A6101). When the time reduction determination data is data without time reduction, the jackpot end setting process 1 is executed in order to shift to the normal gaming state after the jackpot ends (A6102), and when the time reduction determination data is data with time reduction, the jackpot is hit. The jackpot end setting process 2 is executed in order to shift to the time saving state after the end (A6103).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is specific area passage information indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 86 (V winning opening) (A6104). As described above, in the jackpot round 1 (first jackpot round) in the case of the probability variation jackpot (10R or 4R probability variation jackpot), the specific area 86 is opened for a long time (A6017), and the specific area switch 72 is set to the specific area. The passage of the game ball to 86 (V winning) is almost certainly detected (regular passage in a specific area). Then, when there is a detection signal of the specific area switch 72, the game control device 100 RAs the specific area passage information indicating that the game ball has passed to the specific area 86 (V winning).
It can be stored in M.

In addition, even in the jackpot round 1 in the case of a normal jackpot (10R normal jackpot), the specific area 86
Although it is opened only for a very short time, the specific area switch 72 may be able to detect the accidental passage of the game ball (V winning) into the specific area 86 (V winning opening) (irregular passage in the specific area).
Also in this case, the game control device 100 can store the specific area passage information in the RAM.

The game control device 100 has no specific area passage information (the result of A6104 is "N").
, The process proceeds to step A6106. On the other hand, when there is specific area passage information (A61)
The result of 04 is “Y”), and the jackpot end setting process 3 is executed (A6105) in order to shift to the probability change state (probability fluctuation state) after the jackpot ends. In this case, the data set in the jackpot end setting process 3 is overwritten with the data set in the jackpot end setting processes 1 and 2, and the data set in the jackpot end setting processes 1 and 2 is invalidated. Become.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the probability information command from the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A6106). In the jackpot end setting process 1-3, a probability information command indicating the presence or absence of a low-probability or high-probability probability state or a time-saving state is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there has been an irregular passage in the specific area (A6107). As mentioned above, the term "irregular passage in a specific area (abnormal passage in a specific area)" means
In the case of a normal big hit, the game ball passes through the specific area 86, and the specific area regular passage (normal passage in the specific area) means that the game ball passes through the specific area 86 in the case of a probability variation big hit. .. For example, if the specific area passage information is generated in the case of a normal big hit, it can be determined that the specific area has passed irregularly. In addition to the regular passage in the specific area, even if the irregular passage in the specific area occurs, the state shifts to the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state) after the end of the big hit.

When there is an irregular passage in a specific area (the result of A6107 is "Y"), the game control device 100 adds irregular probability variation information to the loaded probability information command (A6108), and includes this probability information. The effect command setting process is executed so that the command is set as the effect command (A6109). On the other hand, when there is no irregular passage in the specific area (the result of A6107 is "N"), the effect command setting process is executed so that the loaded probability information command is set as the effect command as it is (A6109).

Next, the game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number in order to return to the special figure 1 normal processing (A6110), and saves the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6111).
.. Then, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (A611).
2). The signals relating to the end of the jackpot here are off-data of one jackpot signal and off-data of three jackpot signals.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (A6113). The signals related to the end of the jackpot here are, for example, off-data of the signal during operation of the condition device, off-data of the signal during operation of the continuous operation device of the accessory, off-data of the signal per special symbol 1, and off-data of the signal per special symbol 2. Is.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the turn-off number in the round LED pointer area (A6114). Subsequently, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the upper prize opening (A6115), and the special figure status area is cleared (A6116). After that, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6117), and the special figure 1 big hit end processing is terminated.

This special figure 2 game wait time value determines the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that has been forcibly terminated (special figure 2 normal processing during special figure 2 game processing), and is used for the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 7). It is set to sometimes delay. Here, the special figure 2 game wait time value is 8 msec (that is, 2 as a value saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area), which is twice the interrupt cycle.

Assuming that the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set, the special figure 2 game process (A1313 in FIG. 7) that is performed immediately after the current special figure 1 game process (A1313 in FIG. 7) in which the special figure 1 jackpot end process is executed ( In A1314) of FIG. 7, since the determination of the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variation display game starts (starts within the timer interrupt process of this time), the special figure 2 variation display game is started from the special figure 1 variation display game. It may be a problem because it starts first. Since the special figure 1 game processing timer is not set in the special figure 1 big hit end processing, it remains 0. Therefore, regarding the determination of the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the next timer interrupt processing (special figure 1)
It is performed in Special Figure 1 Normal processing during game processing).

The special figure 2 game wait time value is set to twice the interrupt cycle (8 msec), but the special figure 2 game process immediately after the special figure 1 game process (starts within the current timer interrupt process). This is because the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec). In the special figure 2 game processing in the next timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game processing timer is further-
It is updated by 1 (decrease of 4 msec) and becomes 0 (the result of A3305 is "Y"), and the determination of the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 variation display game (special figure 2 normal processing during special figure 2 game processing) is performed. .. As a result, in the next timer interrupt process after the end of the jackpot state by the special figure 1 variable display game, the determination of the variable start of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game (special figure 1 game processing and special figure). 2) If the game processing) is performed and the start condition (start condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing at the same time. As described above, while the special figure 1 variable display game is in the big hit state, the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped with an outlier symbol (forced termination or originally not changed).

If there is no particular problem in game control even if the special figure 2 variable display game starts before the special figure 1 variable display game after the jackpot state ends, the process of step A6717 is omitted. FIG. 2 It is not necessary to set the game weight time value.

[Special figure 2 jackpot end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 jackpot end process (A3318) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 jackpot end processing.

The steps A6201 to A6216 of the special figure 2 big hit end processing replace "special figure 1" in the special figure 1 big hit end processing steps A6101 to A6116 with "special figure 2", respectively, and the special figure 1 big hit end processing. Since the same processing as in the processing steps A6101 to A6116 is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

It is not necessary to set the special figure 1 game wait time value in the special figure 2 big hit end process. Since the special figure 1 game processing timer and the special figure 2 game processing timer are not set, they remain 0. In the next timer interrupt processing, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game start to change. (Inside the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing), and if the start condition (starting condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game start changing at the same time. Because it can be done.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
Next, the jackpot end setting process 1 (A6102, A62) in the special figures 1 and 2 jackpot end process
The details of 02) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1.

First, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start of no time reduction state (no time reduction) in the external information output data area (A6301). Here, the signal relating to the start without the time saving state is off-data of two jackpot signals. The signal relating to the start without the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (A6302). Here, the signals related to the start without the time saving state are the special symbol 1 high probability state signal off data, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal off data, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal off data, and the special symbol 2 variation. It is the off data of the time shortening state signal, the off data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, and the off data of the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the number without the time saving state in the game state display number area (A6303), and saves the normal time saving flag in the normal figure game mode flag area (A6).
304), save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A)
6305). The normal map time reduction no flag indicates that the game is not in the time reduction fluctuation state (time reduction state, normal power support state) of the normal map fluctuation display game. The special figure low probability & no time saving flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low and the time saving state (normal power support state) is not reached.

After that, the game control device 100 clears the time reduction fluctuation frequency region to 0 (A6306).
A signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, off-data of the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6307). Then, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED (first game state display unit 57), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A6308), and the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery is used. The probability information command (low probability) indicating a low probability is saved (A6309), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, the jackpot end setting process 2 (A6103, A62) in the special figures 1 and 2 jackpot end process
The details of 03) will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 2.

First, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of the time reduction in the external information output data area (A6501). Here, the signal relating to the start of the time reduction is on-data of two jackpot signals. The on-data of the big hit 2 signals is saved in the external information output data area at the start of the big hit fanfare (A5709, A5811), and the on-data of the big hit 2 signals continues from the big hit to the external information terminal 71. As a result, it will be output to an external device (such as a hall computer).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start of the time saving state (time saving) in the test signal output data area (A6502). Here, the signals related to the start with the time saving state are the special symbol 1 high probability state signal off data, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal off data, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal on data, and the special symbol 2 variation. The on-data of the time shortening state signal, the on-data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, and the on-data of the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the number with the time saving state in the game state display number area (A6503), and saves the flag with the time saving state in the normal figure game mode flag area (A).
6504), save the special figure low probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (6504)
A6505). The flag with time reduction of the normal map indicates that the game is in the time saving fluctuation state (time saving state, normal power support state) of the normal map fluctuation display game. The special figure low probability & time saving flag indicates that the probability of big hit is low probability and the time saving state (normal power support state).

Next, the game control device 100 saves an initial value (for example, 100) in the time reduction fluctuation number area for storing the time reduction fluctuation number (A6506), and indicates that the time reduction state is in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery. The information command (time saving) is saved (A6507), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated.

Since the right-handed state is advantageous from the big hit state, the right-handed setting is not performed in the big hit end setting process 2.

[Big hit end setting process 3]
Next, special figures 1 and 2 jackpot end setting process 3 (A6105, A62) in the jackpot end process
The details of 05) will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 3.

First, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of the time reduction in the external information output data area (A6801). Here, the signal relating to the start of the time reduction is on-data of two jackpot signals. The on-data of the big hit 2 signals is saved in the external information output data area at the start of the big hit fanfare (A5709, A5811), and the on-data of the big hit 2 signals continues from the big hit to the external information terminal 71. As a result, it will be output to an external device (such as a hall computer).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start with high probability and time saving in the test signal output data area (A6802). Here, the signals related to the start with high probability & time reduction are special symbol 1 high probability state signal on-data, special symbol 2 high probability state signal on-data, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal on-data, special symbol. 2 It is on-data of the fluctuation time shortened state signal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the number with the time saving state in the game state display number area (A6803), and saves the special figure high probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A6804). The special figure high probability & time reduction flag indicates that the jackpot probability is high probability and the time reduction state (here, the time reduction fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is executed).

After that, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, on-data of the launch position designation signal 1) in the test signal output data area (A6805). Then, in order to light the right-handed display LED (first game state display unit 57), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A6806), and the power failure recovery transmission command area is used. The probability information command (high probability) indicating a high probability is saved (A6807), and the jackpot end setting process 3 is terminated.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (A3319) in the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of processing during small hit fanfare.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit opening command for opening the lower prize opening as an effect command (A6901), and executes an effect command setting process (A6902). next,
"8" is set as the processing number (A6903), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6904), and the small hit opening time (for example, 1600) is set as the opening time of the lower prize opening.
msec) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6905).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation (on-data of the signal during operation of the special electric accessory 2) in the test signal output data area (A6906), and saves the signal in the large winning opening solenoid output data area. Save the lower prize opening on-data (A6907). As a result, the lower large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is opened in the small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game.

Next, the game control device 100 is a count switch of the big winning opening (lower big winning opening switch 38).
The large winning opening count area for storing the count number (detection number) of a and / or the upper large winning opening switch 39a) is cleared (A6908), and the processing during the small hit fanfare is completed.

In the present embodiment, there is only a small hit opening pattern in which the large winning opening opens only once, but there may be a small hit opening pattern in which the large winning opening is repeatedly opened and closed. In addition, as a processing number, "8
By setting ", it is possible to shift to the small hit medium processing after the small hit fanfare medium processing is completed.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 small hit end process (A3322) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special drawing 2 small hit end processing.

The game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number in order to return to the normal processing in Special Figure 2 (
A7301), save the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A7302). Next, the signal related to the end of the small hit (special symbol 2 small hit signal off data) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7303), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area. (A7304). Further, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (A7305), and the special figure status area is cleared (A7306).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of occurrence of a jackpot is a low probability state and a state without time reduction (a state without normal electric support), that is, a special figure low probability & no time reduction (normally). It is determined whether or not the player is in the gaming state (A7307). When it is not during the special figure low probability & no time reduction (during the normal gaming state) (the result of A7307 is “N”), the processes after step A7310 are executed.

The game control device 100 is in the case of low probability of special figure & no time reduction (during normal game state) (A).
The result of 7307 is "Y"), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (off data of the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A7308), and the number in the left-handed state in the game state display number 2 area. Is saved (A7309), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (A7310).

When the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted (the result of A7310 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares the decorative special figure 1 restart command as an effect command (A7311), and executes the effect command setting process. (A7312). The effect control device 300 that has received the decoration special figure 1 restart command can execute the process of restarting the decoration special figure 1 variation display game. After that, special figure 1
The game interruption flag area is cleared (A7313), and the special figure 2 small hit end process is completed. When the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted (the result of A7310 is "N"), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (A7313) without preparing the decorative special figure 1 restart command.
Special figure 2 Ends small hit end processing

For the same reason as in the special figure 2 big hit end process (FIG. 41), it is not necessary to set the game wait time value in the special figure 2 small hit end process.

[Control of production control device]
The control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 by the effect control program will be described below.

[Main processing (effect control device)]
First, the details of the main processing executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 47
Is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main process is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (directing microcomputer) when the power is turned on to the game machine 10. In the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the step code (number) is represented as "B ***".

When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first disables interrupts (
B0001). Next, the initial settings of CPU311 and VDP312 are executed (B0002, B).
0003) Allow interrupts (B0004). When the interrupt is permitted, the game control device 1
The command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from 00 is ready to be executed.

Next, the effect control device 300 permits the generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed to be used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at the time of turning on the power is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0).
008). The WDT is started with the CPU initial setting (B0002) described above, and the CPU 311
Monitor whether is working properly. If the WDT is not cleared even after a certain period of time has passed, the WDT time is up and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the effect control device 300 uses the RTC (real-time clock) 3 as a timekeeping means.
The RTC reading process for reading the time information from 38 is executed (B0009).

In the RTC reading process, the time information may be read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every minute), and it is not necessary to read the time information every time the process shifts to step B0009. Further, the RTC reading process may be executed only once when the power is turned on to the effect control device 300 (that is, the power is turned on to the game machine 10) (the position of the RTC reading process may be changed, for example, step B0003). And B0004 may be executed). The effect control device 300 sets a time timer (timekeeping means) for measuring the time in the timer area in the RAM, and when the time information is read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or when the power is turned on, the time is set from the RTC 338 only once. When the information is read, the time timer may be adjusted to match the time of RTC338. Then, the effect control device 300 may execute various processes by using the time timer instead of the RTC 338. By doing so, the number of times of processing for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

In the RTC reading process, when the read time matches any of a plurality of predetermined times (first predetermined time, second predetermined time, ...), A predetermined effect may be executed, but a plurality of By drawing a lottery for the time interval of the predetermined time with a probability corresponding to the set value, the player can estimate the set value from this time interval. For example, the lottery may be drawn so that the selection rate at long time intervals becomes smaller as the set value is larger. In addition, the player can estimate the set value from the execution period of the predetermined effect by drawing a lottery for the execution period for executing the predetermined effect with a probability corresponding to the set value. For example, the lottery may be drawn so that the selection rate for a long execution period increases as the set value increases.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b) by the player, or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. The effect button input process is executed (B0010). continue,
The hall / player setting mode process that accepts operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal by the person in charge of the game hall (game store) or the player is executed (B0011). In the hall / player setting mode processing, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes an effect point control process for adding or clearing the effect points (B0012). In the effect point control process, the effect points are added by executing the effect or operation for which the effect points are to be added, and at the end of the game so that the effect points can be carried over to the next game. For example, information including information on production points and the like is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display the QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall / player setting mode processing. The player can estimate the set value from the added value by drawing a value (added value) to be added to the effect points with a probability according to the set value. For example, the lottery may be performed so that the selection rate of the large addition value increases as the set value increases.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as an effect random number (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check process. (B0014). The details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48.

Next, the effect control device 300 updates various data according to the contents to be displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. Execute the effect display editing process (B0015). As for the drawing data set at this time, the image of the display device 41 can be updated without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within the frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the preparation for drawing in the display frame buffer is completed, and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0016).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B).
0017). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0017 is "N"), the process of B0017 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached, and if it is the frame switching timing (the result of B0017 is "Y"), the display device 41 is displayed. Instruct screen drawing (B0
018). Since the frame period of this embodiment is 1/30 second, the frame is switched when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period), for example. .. The image may not be updated in 1/60 seconds, and the interval may be further increased.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0019).

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling a decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) including LEDs and the like (B0020). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling an effect device (board effect device 44, frame effect device) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B002).
1). In the movable body control process, for example, an accessory operation effect for driving the motor is set.

Then, when the effect control device 300 finishes the process of B0021, it returns to the process of B0008. After that, the processes from B0008 to B0021 are repeated.

[Receive command check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the details of the received command check process (B0014) in the above-mentioned main process (FIG. 47) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of command receptions is 0 (B1102). When the number of commands received is 0, that is, when there is no command received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there is no command to analyze, so the received command check process ends.

On the other hand, when the number of command receptions is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 is a command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of commands received (B1103)
), Copy the contents of the receive command buffer of RAM to the command area for analysis (B11)
04). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of command received is subtracted before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (adds only 1) (B1105). The received command buffer 32 received commands
It is configured to store up to one. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of the command read index 0 to 31, and here, the received commands are read in the index order and copied to the command area for analysis. When the copy to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the copy of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is "N". ”), The processing of steps B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is saved in the reception command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received commands are analyzed separately in the command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, by always securing a free area without performing direct analysis in the received command buffer, it is possible to prepare for a large amount of commands received.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed, the effect control device 300 (the result of B1106 is "Y".
]), The received command content of the command area for analysis is loaded (B1107), and the received command analysis process for analyzing the content is executed (B1108). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 49 below. In addition, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1110), and if the analysis is not completed (the result of B1110 is "N"), the step. The processing of B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is "Y]), the reception command check process is terminated.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the above-mentioned received command check process (FIG. 48) will be described. FIG. 49 shows the effect control device 30.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the received command analysis processing executed by 0.

First, the effect control device 300 separates the upper byte of the received command as a MODE unit and the lower byte as an ACTION unit (ACT unit) (B1201). The commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 are the MODE unit (MODE command) and A.
It is composed of a CTION unit (ACTION command), and is usually continuously transmitted from a MODE unit indicating the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower levels of the received command are M.
The ODE section and the ACTION section are configured in this order.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit is in the normal range (B12).
02). That is, it is determined whether or not the value can be taken by the MODE unit indicating the type of the command (the value assigned as the command specification indicating the type). Then, when the MODE unit is in the normal range (the result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION unit is in the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value (value assigned as a command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION unit indicating the content of the command (specific production instruction, etc.). Then, when the ACTION section is in the normal range (B1203)
The result is "Y"), and the ACTION section for the MODE section determines whether or not the combination is correct (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by a command of the type specified by the MODE section. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), the command processing according to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE unit is within the range of the variable command (B1205). The variable command is a command for instructing a variable pattern of a special decorative symbol, and there is a variable command (set in the variable start information setting process). And MODE
When the part represents a variable command (the result of B1205 is "Y"), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a variable command, the effect control device 300 is (B12).
The result of 05 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section is within the range of the hit command (B).
1207). The hit command is a command for commanding an operation related to the effect during hit (display of fanfare screen or round screen, etc.). For example, a jackpot fanfare command (set by processing during special figure display), a round command (fanfare / Interval command (set by processing during interval opening), interval command (set by processing while opening large winning opening), ending command (set by processing while opening large winning opening), small hit fanfare command, command during opening small hit (small hit round command), Small hit end screen command (small hit ending command), etc. Then, when the MODE unit represents a hit command (the result of B1207 is “Y”), the hit command process is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a hit command, the effect control device 300 is (B12).
The result of 07 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section is within the range of symbol commands (B).
1209). The symbol-based commands include a decorative special figure 1 command and a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. And when the MODE part represents a design command, (
The result of B1209 is "Y"), the design command process is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis process is completed.

When the MODE unit does not represent a symbol-based command, the effect control device 300 is (B12).
The result of 09 is "N"), and then it is determined whether the MODE section is within the range of the single-shot command (B).
1211). Then, when the MODE unit represents a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "Y"), the single-shot command process is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a single-shot command, the effect control device 300 is (B12).
The result of 11 is “N”), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (B1213). The look-ahead symbol command includes a look-ahead stop symbol command. Then, when the MODE unit represents a look-ahead symbol-based command (the result of B1213 is "Y"), the look-ahead symbol-based command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis process is terminated. If the jackpot probability at the time of reception is in a low probability state, the look-ahead symbol system command processing is executed using the look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability), and if the jackpot probability at the time of reception is in a high probability state, look-ahead is executed. A look-ahead symbol-based command process may be executed using a stop symbol command (low probability).

When the MODE unit does not represent a look-ahead symbol command, the effect control device 300 (
The result of B1213 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (B1215). The look-ahead variation command includes a look-ahead variation pattern command. Then, when the MODE section represents a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "
Y ”), the look-ahead variable command process is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the MODE unit does not represent a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "N"), the effect control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only in the test mode). Since there is a possibility, the received command analysis process is terminated. If the MODE section is not in the normal range (B1202 result is "N"), the ACTION section is not in the normal range (B1203 result is "N"), or AC for the MODE section.
Even if the TION unit is not the correct combination (the result of B1204 is "N"), the reception command analysis process is terminated.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the details of the single-shot command processing (B1212) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 49) described above will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a procedure of single-shot command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a model designation command indicating the type of the game machine (B1301). Then, when the MODE section represents a model specification command (the result of B1301 is "Y"), the model setting process for setting the type of the gaming machine is executed (B).
1302), the single-shot command processing is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the model designation command, the effect control device 300 is (B1).
The result of 301 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents the RAM initialization command (B1303). And when the MODE part represents the command of RAM initialization, (
The result of B1303 is "Y"), the RAM initialization setting process for notifying the RAM initialization and the like is executed (B1304), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

If the MODE unit does not represent a RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a power failure recovery command (B1305). ). Then, when the MODE section represents a power failure recovery command (B13)
The result of 05 is "Y"), the power failure recovery setting process is executed (B1306), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not indicate a power failure recovery command, the effect control device 300 is (B1).
The result of 305 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents the customer waiting demo command (B1307). Then, when the MODE section represents a customer waiting demo command (B130)
The result of 7 is “Y”), the customer waiting demo setting process is executed (B1308), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the customer waiting demo command, the effect control device 300 is (B).
The result of 1307 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (B1309). Then, when the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 hold information setting process is executed (B1310).
Terminates single-shot command processing.

In the effect control device 300, if the MODE section does not represent the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is "N"), then whether or not the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 2 hold number command. (B1311). Then, when the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 hold information setting process is executed (B131).
2) End the single-shot command processing.

The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the probability information command when the MODE unit does not represent the decorative special figure 2 hold number command (the result of B1311 is "N"). (B1313). Then, when the MODE part represents a probability information command, (B1
The result of 313 is "Y"), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a probability information command, the effect control device 300 is (B1).
The result of 313 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE section represents an error / invalid command (B1315). Note that there are, for example, an error occurrence command, an illegal release command, a state off command, and a state on command as error / illegal commands. As a status on command, a signal is generated from the glass frame opening detection switch 63 (glass frame opening error) and a signal is generated from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) (main body frame opening error, front frame). There is a command indicating (open error). In addition, the state off command indicates that no error has occurred.

Then, when the MODE section represents an error / invalid command (the result of B1315 is "Y"), an error / invalid setting process for notifying or canceling the error or invalidity is executed ().
B1316), the single-shot command processing is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent an error / illegal command (the result of B1315 is "N"), the MODE section then sends a command for switching the effect mode (processing during special figure display). It is determined whether or not it represents (set by etc.) (B1317). Then, when the MODE unit represents a command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the effect mode switching setting process is executed (B1318), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the effect control device 300 does not represent the command for switching the effect mode (the result of B1317 is "N"), then the MODE section represents the out ball number command indicating the number of out balls. Whether or not it is determined (B1319). Then, when the MODE section represents the out-ball count command (the result of B1319 is "Y"), the out-ball count reception processing is executed (B1).
320), the single-shot command processing is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent the out-ball count command, the effect control device 300 is (B).
The result of 1319 is "N"), and then it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents a count command (large winning opening count command) (B1321). Then, when the MODE unit represents the count command of the large winning opening switch (the result of B1321 is "Y"), the count information setting process is executed (B1322), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

When the MODE unit does not represent a count command, the effect control device 300 is (B).
The result of 1321 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents the set value information command (probability set value information command) (B1323). The set value information command is in step A of FIG. 6B.
It is included in the command for power failure recovery in 1046 and the command for RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044. And when the MODE part represents the setting value information command, (
The result of B1323 is "Y"), the processing at the time of receiving the set value is executed (B1324), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In the set value reception processing, the set value (probability set value) is stored in a storage unit such as RAM and necessary processing is executed.

When the MODE unit does not represent the set value information command, the effect control device 300 is (B).
The result of 1323 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents a setting change type command (B1325). As a setting change command, for example, a command during probability setting change (A)
There is 1030). Then, when the MODE section represents a setting change type command (B13)
The result of 25 is “Y”), the setting change system information setting process is executed (B1326), and the single-shot system command process is terminated. In the setting change information setting process, the contents of the setting change command are memorized and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command for which the probability setting is being changed is received, in the setting change system information setting process, a setting changing display for notifying the player that the setting is being changed is displayed on the display device 41.

When the MODE unit does not represent a setting change system command, the effect control device 300 (
The result of B1325 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents a command of the setting confirmation system (B1327). As a setting confirmation command, for example, a command during probability setting confirmation (
There is A1033). Then, when the MODE section represents a setting confirmation command (B1)
The result of 327 is "Y"), the setting confirmation system information setting process is executed (B1328), and the single-shot system command process is terminated. In the setting confirmation system information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are memorized and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command during probability setting confirmation is received, in the setting confirmation system information setting process, a setting confirmation display for notifying the player that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the display device 41.

Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE unit represents a command to stop the symbol (B1329). The symbol stop command includes, for example, a symbol stop command of special figure 1 (decorative special figure 1 stop command) and a symbol stop command of special figure 2 (decorative special figure 2 stop command). And MODE
When the part represents a command to stop the symbol (the result of B1329 is "Y"), the effect control device 3
Next, 00 determines whether or not the command of the MODE section is a normal command (B13).
30).

If the command in the MODE section is a normal command (the result of B1330 is "Y")
, The effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1331), sets the game state flag to the normal state after all the symbols have stopped (B1332), and ends the single-shot command processing. In the process of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to the normal state, but depending on the timing when this process is executed, the game state flag is a flag of "changing", "big hit", and "small hit". Is set.

On the other hand, when the MODE section does not represent the command to stop the symbol (the result of B1329 is "N".
”) Or when the command of the MODE section is not normal (the result of B1330 is“ N ”).
The effect control device 300 ends the single-shot command processing.

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 50, the MODE section is decorated with a special figure 1 interruption command (A5).
413) or decoration special figure 1 When representing the restart command (A7311), the effect control device 300
May execute a process of interrupting or resuming the decorative special figure 1 variable display game.

[Look-ahead design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the details of the look-ahead symbol-based command processing (B1214) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 49) described above will be described. FIG. 51 shows the effect control device 30.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the look-ahead symbol system command processing executed by 0.

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the latest hold information is the information of the special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory), for example, the latest received decorative special figure hold number command is the decorative special figure 1 hold number. It is determined whether or not it is a command (B1601). When the latest hold information is the information of special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is "Y"), the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) is set to the special figure 1 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number. Save (B1602).

In the effect control device 300, when the latest hold information is not the information on the special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is "N"), that is, the latest received decorative special figure hold number command is the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. In this case, the look-ahead symbol system command (look-ahead stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 look-ahead symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number (B1603).

After steps B1602 and B1603, the effect control device 300 sets a look-ahead variable command reception waiting flag indicating that the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received (B160).
4). This is because the look-ahead symbol command and the look-ahead variable command are set, and the game control device 100 transmits the look-ahead variable command following the look-ahead symbol command. After that, the look-ahead symbol command processing is terminated.

[Look-ahead variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the details of the look-ahead variable command process (B1216) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (FIG. 49) will be described. FIG. 52 shows the effect control device 30.
It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the look-ahead variable system command processing executed by 0.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received (B1701). When the above-mentioned look-ahead variable command reception wait flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received. If the read-ahead variable command is not waiting to be received (the result of B1701 is "N"), the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated. When waiting for reception of a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1701 is "
Y ”), clear the look-ahead variable command reception wait flag (B1702).

Next, the effect control device 300 (sub-board) has the latest hold information symbol (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2).
Set the look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of holds (B1703), and acquire the look-ahead variation command MODE section in the sub corresponding to the MODE section of the look-ahead variation command (B1703).
B1704). Next, the look-ahead fluctuation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command ACT corresponding to the ACTION section (ACT section) of the look-ahead fluctuation system command is set.
Acquire a part (B1706).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the converted MODE unit and ACT unit (that is, the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE unit and ACT unit) are both other than 0 (B1707).
.. If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a command other than 0. MODE part after conversion, A
When both CT parts are other than 0 (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the converted MODE part and A
The converted command composed of the CT unit is saved in the read-ahead fluctuation command area (special figure 1 look-ahead fluctuation command area or special figure 2 look-ahead fluctuation command area) corresponding to the latest hold information and the number of holds (B1708). Then, the look-ahead command consistency check process is executed (B170).
9), it is determined whether or not the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is normal (B1710).
).

It should be noted that the time of the first half fluctuation corresponding to the MODE section changes depending on the number of holds when the hold is changed and the display game is started. Hold changes When starting a display game, if there are no other holds, the first half will be longer, and if a new hold occurs and the number of holds is large, the first half will be shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half fluctuation is changed, the MODE section of the received look-ahead fluctuation command is converted into the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE section so that the internal command of the effect control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

Further, since the type of reach is not related to the number of holds, the latter half change corresponding to the sub-pre-reading change command ACT section does not depend on the number of holds. However, because there are different types of reach for the same system,
Temporarily, the effect control device 30 does not convert the ACT unit (value of the latter half fluctuation) of the look-ahead fluctuation system command.
If 0 is used as it is, the number will increase and it will be difficult to check. For example, for normal reach
There are types such as normal reach-1 stop off and normal reach +1 stop off.
Therefore, by converting the ACT unit showing the reach of the same system into the same sub-pre-reading variation command ACT unit, the number is reduced and the burden of the check processing such as the pre-reading command matching check processing is reduced.

Next, in the effect control device 300, when at least one of the converted MODE unit and the ACT unit (that is, the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE unit and the ACT unit) is 0 (the result of B1707 is "N"), or , When the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is not normal (B171)
If the result of 0 is "N"), it is assumed that there is an abnormality in the converted command, and the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated.

In the effect control device 300, when the combination of the MODE unit and the ACT unit after conversion is normal (B).
The result of 1710 is "Y"), the hold information (latest hold information) to be read ahead is loaded from the look-ahead variable command area (B1711), and the look-ahead lottery process related to the look-ahead effect of the latest hold is executed (B1712). The look-ahead effect includes, for example, a continuous advance notice effect (including a chance look-ahead effect), a look-ahead zone effect, and a hold change advance notice. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest hold look-ahead effect (hold change notice, etc.) occurs (B1713). When the latest hold look-ahead effect occurs (the result of B1713 is "Y"), the point information corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1714).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the pre-reading effect (holding change notice, etc.) that occurs is an effect that immediately starts (B1715). When the generated look-ahead effect is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is "Y"), the display corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (B1716). When the pre-reading effect that occurs is not an effect that starts immediately (B1715)
The result is "N"), and the display corresponding to the look-ahead effect at the time of hold shift (when the hold display is moved or the number of holds is reduced) is set and saved (B1717). Then, the look-ahead variable command processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the effect control device 300, when the latest hold look-ahead effect does not occur (the result of B1713 is "N"), or when the generated look-ahead effect does not start immediately (B171).
The result of 5 is "N"), as it is. Ends the look-ahead variable command processing.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the details of the symbol-based command processing (B1210) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 49) described above will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 receives a symbol-based command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2).
The special figure type corresponding to the MODE section of the command) is set (B1801). The special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT) of the design command.
Set the symbol type corresponding to the combination of (part) and save it in a predetermined area such as RAM (B180).
2). Here, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the symbol type is set by using the table for each MODE. In the present embodiment, the symbol type corresponds to the out-of-order symbol, the 10R probability variation jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 28, the 4R probability variation jackpot symbol, and the 10R normal jackpot symbol.

[Variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 49) described above will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a procedure of variable command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 is a special figure type (special figure 1) of the received variable system command (variable command).
Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2) is undecided (B1901). When the special figure type is undecided (the result of B1901 is "Y"), the variable command processing is terminated. If the special symbol type is not undecided (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable command and symbol command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable command and symbol type are inconsistent. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency means that there is a contradiction in performing the production, such as when a design command of a jackpot symbol is received even though a variable command of an outlier is received. When the variable command and the symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y")
, Ends variable command processing.

When the variable system command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines the variable pattern type from the variable system command (variable command) (B1).
904), the variable effect setting process for setting the variable effect, which is the effect being changed, is executed (B19).
05). In addition, there are a plurality of effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the special figure changing is set in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects of the continuous notice effect (the remaining number of continuous notice effects) is not 0, the number is updated by -1. (B1907)
).

[Variable effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the details of the variation effect setting process (B1905) in the variation system command process (FIG. 54) described above will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the variation pattern type is reachless variation (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). When the fluctuation pattern type is non-reach fluctuation (the result of B2001 is "Y"), the number of production points, the model code,
Set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the special figure type, effect mode, and set value (probability set value) (B2002), and correspond to the MODE part of the variable command (variable command) and the number of reserved special figure types. First half notice Get the address of the distribution group table (B200)
3). In the case of non-reach fluctuation, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holds increases, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of holds is acquired.

When the fluctuation pattern type is not reachless fluctuation (the result of B2001 is “N”), that is, when the fluctuation pattern type is reach fluctuation, the effect control device 300 includes the number of production points, the model code, the special figure type, and the effect mode. Set the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and set value (probability setting value) (B2004), and set the MODE part of the variable command (variable command) and the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the variable pattern type. Get the address of (B2005).

After steps B2003 and B2005, the effect control device 300 draws a lottery for advance notices that appear during the first half fluctuation (before reach) (B2006). The lottery probability of the advance notice depends on the set value. Next, set the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, symbol type, and set value (probability setting value) (B2007), and set the variable command. The address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT section is acquired (B2008), and the notice lottery that appears during the second half fluctuation (during reach) is performed (B2009). The lottery probability of the advance notice depends on the set value. After that, the content of the variable effect corresponding to the MODE section and the ACT section of the variable command (variable command) is determined (B2010). In addition, the fluctuation time and main reach contents can be known from the fluctuation command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the advance notice (B2011). Then, the content of the setting suggestion effect for suggesting the set value (probability set value, setting) is determined (B2012). After that, a stop symbol setting process for determining the stop symbol of the decorative special symbol variation display game is executed according to the content of the variation effect such as the reach effect or the advance notice effect (B2013). Here, the decoration stop symbol is specifically determined, such as determining the looseness in the case of the out-of-order symbol.

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the display of the setting suggestion effect (B2014). Set the display of variable effects such as reach effects (B2015), and set the display of notice effects (B20).
16). Subsequently, the display of the hold reduction (hold shift) corresponding to the special figure type is set. For example, the display of reducing the hold display corresponding to the decorative special figure that fluctuates this time is set, and the look-ahead effect at the time of the hold shift is set. The corresponding display information (B1717) and the like are read out (B2017). Subsequently, a voice number that determines the effect mode (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines the effect mode by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B2018). The decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting units (decorative LEDs, etc.) and emits light in a light emitting mode (color, light emitting timing, etc. of each LED) defined by a decoration number. ..

It is possible to set the voice number and the decoration number not only based on the effect content but also by drawing lots with a lottery probability according to the set value (probability setting value). In this way, the player can see the light emitting mode of the decorative device, that is, the light emitting mode of the decorative light emitting unit (LED).
You can enjoy guessing the set value (probability set value) of.

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the display of the decorative special figure variation corresponding to the special figure type (B).
2019), in addition to the first to third special symbols, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation regarding the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol, identification information) is performed (B2020). The fourth symbol variation is the display device 41.
Lamp display units 1, 2 (LEDs) of the above-mentioned lamp display device 80 provided in addition to the above, and / or
It is displayed on the display device 41.

[Hit system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the details of the hit command process (B1208) in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (FIG. 49) will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a procedure of hit system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE unit of the received hit system command represents a fanfare (B2101). When the MODE part of the hit command represents a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), that is, when the hit command is a big hit fanfare command or a small hit fanfare command, the fanfare effect setting process for setting the fanfare effect. Is executed (B2102). The fanfare command includes information on the upper limit of the number of rounds for this big hit. Next, the game status flag indicating the current gaming status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10 is set to during fanfare (
B2103), the hit command processing is terminated. The upper limit of the number of rounds can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol command (decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

When the MODE section of the received hit command does not represent a fanfare (the result of B2101 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section of the hit command represents a round ( B2104). When the MODE unit represents a round (the result of B2104 is "Y"), that is, when the hit system command is a round command or a small hit open command, the effect control device 300 executes the round effect setting process and is currently Set the game status flag indicating the game status (P machine status) of the game machine 10 in the round (B2105, B21).
06), the hit command processing is terminated.

If the MODE section of the received hit command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section of the hit command represents an interval ("N". B2107). When the MODE part represents an interval (B2107
The result is "Y"), that is, when the hit system command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process and indicates the game state (P machine state) of the current game machine 10. Set the status flag to be in the interval (B2108, B2109), and end the hit command processing. There is no interval command when the big winning opening is opened only once with a small hit, that is, when the small hit is one round.

If the MODE part of the received hit command does not represent the interval (B2107)
The result is "N"), and the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section of the hit system command represents the ending (B2110). When the MODE part represents the ending (B21
When the result of 10 is "Y"), that is, when the hit system command is an ending command or a small hit end screen command, the effect control device 300 executes the ending effect setting process for setting the ending effect, and the current end effect setting process is executed. Ending is set in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 (B2111, B2112), and the hit system command processing is terminated.

If the MODE part of the received hit command does not represent the ending (B2)
The result of 110 is "N"), and the effect control device 300 ends the hit system command process without executing any process.

Hereinafter, the setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 66.

[Time chart of setting suggestion effect]
FIG. 57 is a time chart of the setting suggestion effect performed by the game machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, a case where the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times in a predetermined period in relation to the special figure variation display game will be described. As a specific example, the starting winning opening 36 or the ordinary variable winning device 3
When the game ball wins in 7, the special figure fluctuation display game is started, the first setting suggestion effect (setting notification effect) is performed before the normal reach (first reach) occurs, and after the normal reach, the setting notification effect is performed.
A case will be described in which the second setting suggestion effect is executed after the SP reach occurs (it does not have to occur) and before the end of the special figure variation display game. The plurality of times may be not only two times but also three times or more.

In the setting suggestion effect, for example, when displaying a variable display game on the display device 41 (FIG. 4), for example, characters A, B, and C (characters having shapes, colors, and patterns that can be distinguished from each other) are displayed. It is an effect that can be displayed and the probability setting value currently set can be suggested by the number of displayed characters, and is generated with a predetermined probability (about 1/100 in this embodiment). Further, the setting suggestion effect also occurs at a timing other than the variable display game (for example, when the ball out error is canceled).

Character A suggests, for example, a so-called odd number setting, and the currently set probability setting value is
It suggests (notifies) that it is any of the odd number of probability setting values (1, 3, 5) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). The internal probability setting value 1 stored in the probability setting value area
~ 6 correspond to the settings 1 to 6, respectively.

Character B suggests, for example, a so-called even number setting, and the currently set probability setting value is
It suggests (notifies) that it is any of the even-numbered probability setting values (2, 4, 6) among the probability setting values (1 to 6).

Character C suggests, for example, that the currently set probability setting value is one of the high setting (probability setting value (5, 6)) among the probability setting values (1 to 6) (notification). Is what you do.

In the first setting suggestion effect, 1 to 3 characters A, B, and C are displayed respectively. In the second setting suggestion effect, 1 to 10 characters A, B, and C are displayed respectively, but 4 to 10 characters are easily selected. For example, the difference in the number of displayed characters A, B, and C is made more remarkable than in the first case, and which character is used to suggest the setting intended by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100). You may be able to judge.

[Reliability of setting suggestion effect]
FIG. 58 is a table showing an example of the reliability of the setting suggestion effect performed by the game machine 10 of the first embodiment. FIG. 58 is merely an example and can be changed as appropriate.

In the setting suggestion effect, for example, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect by the character (character) can be set by the number of characters A, B, and C. By drawing the number of characters with a winning probability according to the setting, the reliability can be set according to the number of characters. When the lottery is performed by distributing to each number, the winning probability is the distribution rate (selection rate). If each number is drawn independently instead of being sorted, duplicate winnings may be made (for example, 4 and 7), but in that case, one of the winnings is selected.

In addition, the setting suggestion effect may be performed only by the character having the maximum number among the characters A, B, and C (the number of characters whose number is not the maximum may be drawn and displayed regardless of the setting so as not to suggest the setting. To do).

As described above, in the first setting suggestion effect, 1 to 3 characters A, B, and C are displayed, respectively. Therefore, when the number of each of the characters A to C is 1, 2, or 3, each is drawn with a winning probability according to the setting.

As described above, in the second setting suggestion effect, 1 to 10 characters A, B, and C are displayed respectively, so that the number of each of the characters A to C is 1, 2, 3, and so on. 4,
The cases of 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10 are drawn with a winning probability according to the setting, respectively. Since it is easy to select 4 to 10 pieces, the winning probability of 4 to 10 pieces is set to 1.
Significantly larger than the winning probability of ~ 3 (extremely set the winning probability of 1 to 3 to zero)
..

As shown in FIG. 58, the reliability is set to increase by 10% each time the number of characters A, B, and C displayed increases by 1, and the reliability is set to 100% when 10 characters are displayed. can do. For example, one, two, and three characters C appear evenly in any setting, and the reliability of the setting suggestion of a high setting is low.

Further, the reliability shown in FIG. 58 can be multiplied by the ratio of the total number of displayed characters to the number of displayed characters with the largest number of displayed characters.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is performed a plurality of times during the variable display game. For example, the first and second settings are set so that a specific character increases, and the second setting is performed. In the suggestion effect, the amount of increase of a specific character (not the number of characters)
The reliability of the setting suggestion may be notified. For example, the setting suggestion by the character with the largest increase amount may be set as the setting suggestion effect intended by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100), and the reliability of the setting suggestion may be notified based on the magnitude of the increase amount. It is possible.

As described above, the setting suggestion effect is set in step B2012 and step B2014 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 55).

[Expectation of big hit]
FIG. 59 is an example of a table showing the relationship between the setting suggestion effect performed by the game machine 10 of the first embodiment and the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 59 (A), in the present embodiment, the expectation of "big hit" is set high when the setting suggestion effect occurs, and set low when the setting suggestion effect does not occur. FIG. 59 is merely an example and can be changed as appropriate.

When a "big hit" occurs, the rate at which the "big hit" occurs after the setting suggestion effect is 80%, and the rate at which the "big hit" occurs without the setting suggestion effect is 20%.

On the contrary, when "disengagement" occurs, the ratio of "disengagement" after the setting suggestion effect is 1%, and the ratio of "disengagement" without the setting suggestion effect is 99%.

As a result, when there is a setting suggestion effect, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that a "big hit" will occur after that, and even if there is no setting suggestion effect, the player will generate a "big hit". Can give a surprise to.

As shown in FIG. 59 (B), setting suggestion is performed by changing the first mode (for example, number, color) of the character appearing in the setting suggestion effect, and the big hit is performed in the second mode (for example, size) of the character. It is also possible to inform the degree of expectation. As described above, the effect control device 300 (game control device 100) is selected by the character having the largest number of characters displayed among the characters A, B, and C.
It is possible to perform the setting suggestion effect intended by). When any one of the characters A, B, and C has a different color from the other characters, the setting suggestion intended by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100) by the character having the different color. It is also possible to produce.

When a "big hit" occurs, the ratio of the "big hit" occurring after the setting suggestion effect displayed by a large character is set to 50%, and the "big hit" is displayed after the setting suggestion effect displayed by a character smaller than the large character. The rate at which "" occurs is 30%, and the rate at which "big hit" occurs without setting suggestion effect is 20%.

On the contrary, when "missing" occurs, the ratio of "missing" after the setting suggestion effect displayed by a large character is set to 1%, and after the setting suggestion effect displayed by a character smaller than the large character. The rate at which "missing" occurs is 1%, and the rate at which "missing" occurs without setting suggestion effect is 98%.

As a result, when there is a setting suggestion effect, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that a "big hit" will occur after that, and by performing the setting suggestion effect with a character having a particularly large display, that expectation can be obtained. It can be further enhanced, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[Screen transition diagram]
FIG. 60 is a screen transition diagram of a setting suggestion effect performed by the game machine 10 of the first embodiment. Here, a case will be described in which a setting suggestion effect is executed when the decorative special figure variation display game in which the variation display develops into the SP reach through the normal reach is executed. The setting suggestion effect is executed before the normal reach (first time) and when the SP reach (SP3 reach) occurs (second time).

FIG. 60 (A1) is a display screen at the time of starting the decorative special figure variation display game. Variable display area 610 (left area 610A, middle area 610C, right area 610) in the center of the display device 41
B) is arranged, and the decoration stop symbols "6, 1, 2" are displayed in the variable display area 610. Further, a variable display area 615 is arranged in the lower right corner of the display device 41, and the variable display area 6 is arranged.
At 15, the stop symbols "6, 1, 2" are displayed. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 in the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41 have a number “3” indicating the special figure 1 hold number and a special figure 2 hold, respectively. The number "0" indicating the number is displayed.

In the first hold display unit 630a that displays the first start memory as the first hold display, the hold display 633 (first hold display) moves to the right (hold shift), and the first hold is placed in the hold digestion area 640 of the rectangular frame. The hold display 633 at the right end of the display unit 630a moves. At present, the hold display 633 is not displayed on the second hold display unit 630b that displays the second start memory as the second hold display (second start memory display).

After that, in (A2), the variation (↓↓↓) of the decorative special symbol (large symbol) is being executed in the variation display area 610 as the identification information, and the variation (↓↓↓) of the decorative reduced symbol (small symbol) as the identification information.
↓) is being executed in the variable display area 615. The left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are varied in the left region 610A, the right region 610B, and the middle region 610C of the variable display area 610, respectively. In addition, a variable hold display 633a indicating a hold related to the special figure change display game being executed (starting memory that was the execution right of this special figure change display game) is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 display a number "2" indicating the special figure 1 hold number and a number "0" indicating the special figure 2 hold number, respectively. ing.

At this time, as the first setting suggestion effect, the character A (bear) is displayed on the display device 41.
, Character B (frog) and character C (tiger) are displayed. In (A2), two characters A, two characters B, and one character C are displayed, but at present, character A is displayed.
The reliability of the setting suggestion of character B is 20%, the reliability of the setting suggestion of character B is 20%, the reliability of the setting suggestion of character C is 10%, and depending on which character, the effect control device 300 (game control device 1)
It is not very clear whether 00) makes the intended setting suggestion.

However, for a player who knows that the setting suggestion effect is performed multiple times, it can be predicted that the setting suggestion effect will be performed with high reliability in the next setting suggestion effect, so the setting suggestion is not clear in this way. Even if it is a setting suggestion effect, the player can pay attention to the effect and concentrate on the game.

The display position of each character is arbitrary, and may be displayed as a still image, or may be displayed as a moving image of each character's facial expression and display position.

Next, in (A3), the reach state (normal reach) is set, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the first setting suggestion effect ends. In (A3), the display of each character is erased, but the display may be continued as it is. At this time, the character display 755
a "Reach" is displayed below the variable display area 610.

After that, in (A4), the reach evolves from the normal reach state to the SP3 reach, the movie production (movie production) is executed in the center of the display screen, and the left and right symbols are in the upper corner of the screen. Moving. At this time, the display of the character display 755a "reach" may be erased.

In addition, with the transition to SP3 reach, the second setting suggestion effect is executed. Here, for example, characters A, B, and C are displayed around the movie effect (movie effect), and more characters than the first setting suggestion effect are displayed. In (A4), three characters A, four characters B, and five characters C are displayed. Here, an example in which setting suggestion is performed based on the number of characters C (5) having the largest number of displayed characters is shown, and the reliability of the setting suggestion of character C (probability setting value is either 5 or 6) is set to 50%. Can be displayed (set) as.

In addition, the number of characters C (5) and the total number of characters displayed (3 + 4 +) are the largest.
According to the ratio of 5 = 12), the reliability of the setting suggestion of character C is (5/12) x 50% = 20.
.. It can also be displayed (set) as 8%. At this time, in order to notify that the reliability of the setting suggestion by the character C is higher, a lottery may be made so that the number of characters A or B displayed is reduced from the first time in the second setting suggestion effect. ..

Further, one character C is displayed at the first time, five characters are displayed at the second time, and the number of displayed characters is increased by four. Therefore, for example, the increase in reliability per character can be set to 10%, and the reliability of the second setting suggestion of character C can be set to 4 × 10% of the increase amount (regardless of the number of characters).

After that, in (A5), the special figure variation display game ends and the setting suggestion effect also ends, the jackpot decoration stop symbol "3, 3, 3" is displayed in the variation display area 610, and the jackpot stop symbol "3" , 3, 3 ”is displayed in the variable display area 615. In addition, the character display 755b "Big hit !!" is displayed below the decorative stop symbol. Further, at this time, the changing hold display 633a displayed in the hold digestion area 640 disappears, and it can be confirmed that one hold has been completely digested.

Subsequently, in (A6), the big hit round game starts, and the big hit state (special game state).
At the same time, the production of the big hit round will start. In addition, in the above setting suggestion effect (first time and / or second time), by displaying the characters A, B, and C larger than those shown in FIG. 60, the expectation of the big hit is further higher. It may be notified (set).

[Time chart of setting suggestion effect (first modification)]
FIG. 61 is a time chart of a first modification of the setting suggestion effect performed by the game machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the first modification, a pseudo continuous effect consisting of a predetermined number of pseudo fluctuations (three times) is executed before the normal reach occurs, the first setting suggestion effect occurs during the second pseudo variation, and the second pseudo variation occurs. The setting suggestion effect occurs during the third pseudo-variation. The pseudo continuous effect and the predetermined number of pseudo variations may be determined, for example, in step B2010 of the variation effect setting process (FIG. 55). The pseudo continuous effect is an effect in which a pseudo variation for varying and temporarily stopping the decorative special symbol (identification information) is performed a predetermined number of times (predetermined step) from the start to the end of one variation display game.

Character A (red) (FIG. 62A) suggests a so-called odd number setting. For example, the currently set probability setting value is an odd number probability setting value (1,3) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). , 5) is suggested.

Character B (blue) (FIG. 62A) suggests a so-called even number setting. For example, the currently set probability setting value is an even number of probability setting values (2, 4) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). , 6) suggests that it is one of them.

For character C (yellow) (FIG. 62A), for example, the currently set probability setting value is a high setting (any of the probability setting values (5, 6)) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). It suggests that there is.

In the first modification, a group effect of forming and displaying a character group by a plurality of characters is executed. In the character group, the total number of characters A (red) and B (blue) is constant (or
(Almost constant), and the reliability of the setting suggestion that the probability setting value is even or odd is notified according to the ratio. In the character group, the reliability of the setting suggestion that the probability setting value is the high setting "5, 6" is further notified by the number of characters C (yellow). The characters A and B may have the same shape only by changing the color.

Since character A (red) and character B (blue) suggest odd-numbered settings and even-numbered settings, which are mutual exclusivity events, keep the total number constant and use the ratio of character A (red) and character B (blue). The reliability of the setting suggestion can be notified.

In the first setting suggestion effect, for example, the ratio of the number of characters A (red): character B (blue) is 7.
: 3 and in the second setting suggestion effect, the ratio of the number of characters A (red): character B (blue) is 9: 1, so that the probability setting value is odd. The degree can be increased. For example, at a ratio of 7: 3, the odd setting reliability is 70% (even setting reliability is 3).
0%), and at a ratio of 9: 1, the reliability of odd-numbered settings is 90% (the reliability of even-numbered settings is 10%).
) May be.

Conversely, in the first setting suggestion effect, for example, the ratio of the number of characters A (red): character B (blue) is 3: 7, and in the second setting suggestion effect, character A (red): character B. By setting the ratio of the number of (blue) to 1: 9, it is possible to increase the reliability of the setting suggestion of the even number setting in which the probability setting value is even. For example, at a ratio of 3: 7, the reliability of even-numbered settings is 70% (the reliability of odd-numbered settings is 30%), and at a ratio of 1: 9, the reliability of even-numbered settings is 90% (the reliability of odd-numbered settings is 90%). It can be 10%).

Furthermore, in the first setting suggestion effect, for example, the number of characters C (yellow) displayed is 5, and in the second setting suggestion effect, the number of characters C (yellow) displayed is increased to 7, so that the probability is probable. It is also possible to increase the reliability of the setting suggestion that the set value is a high setting.

In the first modification, for example, when character C (character A or character B may be used) is not displayed in the first setting suggestion effect, or when neither character A, character B, or character C is displayed, a big hit is achieved. Expectations can be set as low. Further, when all the characters A, B, and C are displayed, it is possible to set it as having a high expectation of a big hit.

It is also possible to set the expectation of the jackpot to change based on the change in the displayed size and color of the characters A, B, and C. When the character performing the setting suggestion effect indicates that the expectation of the jackpot is high in this way, it may be performed together with the display mode change indicating that the expectation of the jackpot is high in the pending display 633a during the change of the holding digestion area 640. , The change in the display mode may be prohibited so that the player can pay attention to the setting suggestion effect.

[Screen transition diagram (first modification)]
FIG. 62A is a screen transition diagram (first half) of a first modification of the setting suggestion effect performed by the game machine 10 of the first embodiment. FIG. 62B is a screen transition diagram (second half) of a first modification of the setting suggestion effect performed by the game machine 10 of the first embodiment.

FIG. 62A (B1) is the same as FIG. 60 (A1). FIG. 62A (B2) is shown in FIG.
Similar to (A2) of 0, the variation display displayed in the variation display area 610 is the first pseudo variation of the pseudo continuous effect.

Then, in (B3), the first pseudo-variation (single effect) of the pseudo-continuous effect is completed, and the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, and in the middle region 610C, the pseudo-continuous symbol suggesting the pseudo-continuous effect. Is stopped and displayed. In addition, the number of executions of pseudo-variation to be started from now on (number of pseudo-continuous)
Character display 752 "pseudo-twice" is displayed.

After that, in (B4), the second pseudo-variation starts and the first setting suggestion effect (
Group production) is performed. For example, as shown in (B4), character A (star-shaped ★), character B (
An image of a meteor shower with a star shape ☆) and character C (triangle △) flowing from right to left on the screen is played for a predetermined time. Then, it is possible to notify that the expectation of a big hit is high by flowing the video.

At this time, for example, the ratio of the number of characters displayed for character A (red) to the number of characters displayed for character B (blue) is
It is 7: 3, and it is informed that the reliability of the setting suggestion of the odd number setting is a little high.
Further, since the character C (yellow) is also displayed, the display of the character C (yellow) can suggest that the setting is high with a predetermined reliability (may be FIG. 58). While the first setting suggestion effect (group effect) is being performed, the character display 752 "pseudo-twice" may be displayed or deleted.

Next, in (B5), the first setting suggestion effect (group effect) ends. Further, also in (B5), the character display 752 "pseudo-twice" may remain displayed or may be erased.
The second pseudo-variation continues in the variation display area 610.

Then, in (B6), the second pseudo variation is completed and the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and in the middle region 610C, the pseudo continuous symbol suggesting the pseudo continuous effect is stopped and displayed. At the same time, the character display 7 indicating the number of executions of the pseudo-variation to be started (the number of pseudo-continuouss)
52 "Pseudo 3 times" is displayed.

After that, in (B7) of FIG. 62B, the pseudo-variation of the third variable decoration special symbol (large symbol) (
↓↓↓) is executed in the variable display area 610 for a predetermined time.

After that, in (B8), the second setting suggestion effect (group effect) is performed. At this time, (B
Similar to 4), an image of a meteor shower by characters A, B, and C flowing from the right to the left of the screen is played for a predetermined time. However, this time, the ratio of the display number of the character A (red) to the display number of the character B (blue) is 9: 1, and the reliability suggesting that the setting is an odd number is further higher.

Further, since the number of characters C (yellow) displayed has also increased from 5 to 7, it is possible to notify that the reliability of the setting suggestion is increased by the increase (see FIG. 58). On the contrary 2
If the number of characters C (yellow) displayed has not increased or decreased in the second setting suggestion effect, it may be notified that the reliability of the setting suggestion by displaying the character C (yellow) is not so high. it can.

Next, in (B9), the reach state is reached, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the setting suggestion effect (group effect) ends. In this case, since the pseudo continuous effect has ended, the middle region 61
Pseudo-continuous symbols are not displayed at 0C. In addition, the character display 755 "reach" has a variable display area 6
It is displayed below 10.

After that, in (B10), the special figure variation display game ends, and the "off" stop symbol "3, 1, 3" is displayed in the variation display area 610 and the variation display area 615. Also, at this time
The variable hold display 633a displayed in the hold digestion area 640 disappears, which confirms that one hold has been completely digested.

[Time chart of setting suggestion effect (second modification)]
FIG. 63 is a time chart of a second modification of the setting suggestion effect performed by the game machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the game machine 10, a character zone effect (for example, a notice effect using the entire display screen) may be performed with a predetermined probability based on a hold prize with a high expectation of a big hit, and this character zone effect causes a big hit. It is possible to notify that the degree of expectation is high.

Therefore, in the second modification, the setting suggestion effect is performed with a predetermined probability when the character zone is entered, and the appearance of the setting suggestion effect notifies that the expectation of a big hit is higher than when only the character zone occurs.

In addition, the character zone continues until the hold that triggered the entry into the character zone is exhausted, and during that time, a plurality of variable display games are played along with the hold digestion. At this time, the setting suggestion effect is performed every time the variable display game is started, and the reliability of the setting suggestion is increased each time.

As described above, in the second modification, the character zone effect is executed over a plurality of special figure variation display games as a look-ahead effect based on hold (look-ahead zone effect), and the look-ahead variation command processing (Fig. It is set in 52). In addition, not limited to this, the character zone production is
Predetermined opportunity (timing) such as when the expectation of a big hit of a special figure fluctuation display game being executed is high
It may be generated in and executed over multiple variable display games, and the variable effect setting process (
It may be set as shown in FIG. 55).

In the second modification, there are already three holds (hold 3, hold 3,) in the first start memory (which may be the second start memory).
In the case of having hold 2 and hold 1), consider a case where a hold (hold 0) with a high expectation of a big hit wins a prize and the hold is consumed in the order of hold 3, hold 2, hold 1, hold 0.

Then, the first setting suggestion effect is performed when the hold 3 is digested, the second setting suggestion effect is performed when the hold 2 is digested, and the third setting suggestion effect is performed when the hold 1 is digested. At the time of digestion of hold 0, the fourth setting suggestion effect is performed.

In the first setting suggestion effect, for example, three characters A that suggest setting an odd probability setting value are displayed, two characters B that suggest setting an even probability setting value are displayed, and a high probability setting value is displayed. Character C that suggests is not displayed (0 is displayed).

In the second setting suggestion effect, for example, three characters A that suggest setting an odd probability setting value are displayed, three characters B that suggest setting an even probability setting value are displayed, and a high probability setting value is displayed. One character C suggesting is displayed.

In the third setting suggestion effect, for example, three characters A that suggest setting an odd probability setting value are displayed, five characters B that suggest setting an even probability setting value are displayed, and a high probability setting value is displayed. Four characters C suggesting are displayed.

In the fourth setting suggestion effect, for example, three characters A that suggest setting an odd probability setting value are displayed, five characters B that suggest setting an even probability setting value are displayed, and a high probability setting value is displayed. Seven characters C suggesting are displayed.

In this way, the number of characters displayed by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100) that suggests the intended setting is increased as the number of special figure variation display games is repeated. FIG. 63
Then, since the number of characters displayed in character B increases and is larger than that of character A, the reliability of the setting suggestion that the probability setting value is even is higher than the reliability of the setting suggestion that the probability setting value is odd. I can judge.

In addition, the number of characters C displayed increases as the number of special figure variation display games increases, such as 0, 1, 4, and 7, so the setting is higher depending on the display mode (increase amount) of the character C. It is also possible to notify that the reliability of the setting suggestion of is high.

On the contrary, if the number of characters C displayed does not increase or decreases even if the number of special figure variation display games is repeated, the reliability of the setting suggestion that the setting is high depending on the display mode (decrease amount) of the character C is high. It is also possible to notify that it is low.

[Screen transition diagram (second modification)]
FIG. 64A is a screen transition diagram (first half) of a second modification of the setting suggestion effect performed by the game machine 10 of the first embodiment. FIG. 64B is a screen transition diagram (second half) of a second modification of the setting suggestion effect performed by the game machine 10 of the first embodiment.

FIG. 64A (C1) is a display screen when starting the decorative special figure variation display game, and FIG. 6A.
The stop symbol is displayed as in 0 (A1). The special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 and the special figure 2 hold number display unit 660 display a number "4" indicating the special figure 1 hold number and a number "0" indicating the special figure 2 hold number, respectively. ..

In (C1), the first hold display unit 630 that displays the first start memory as the first hold display.
In a, the hold display 633 (hold 3) moves to the right side (hold shift), and the hold display 633 at the right end of the first hold display unit 630a moves to the hold digestion area 640 of the quadrangular frame.

Here, the hold display 633 (hold 0) displayed on the first hold display unit 630a is pre-determined as having a high expectation of a big hit at the time of winning and performing a setting suggestion effect. As a result, the hold display 633 (hold 0) notifies that the color and the like are changed to a different display mode from the other hold and the degree of expectation is high, but the display mode may be omitted.

After that, in (C2), the same variation display as in (A3) of FIG. 60 is performed, and the digestion of the hold 3 is started. At this time, the changing hold display 633a indicating the hold (hold 3) related to the special figure change display game being executed is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. At this time, the special figure 1 hold number displayed by the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 is “3”.

Further, when the digestion of the hold 3 is started, the first setting suggestion effect is performed and the character zone is entered, and the background (color, pattern, etc.) displayed on the display device 41 changes.

In (C2), three characters A (bear) are displayed, two characters B (frogs) are displayed, and character C (tiger) is not displayed.

By the way, as described above, the hold display 633 (hold 0) is pre-determined as having a high expectation of a big hit at the time of winning and performing a setting suggestion effect. Therefore, it is also possible to enter the character zone at the stage where the hold 0 is won (the stage before (C1)). However, by rushing into the character zone when the hold 3 is digested, the degree of attention to the hold 3 can be increased.

After that, in (C3), the first variable display game ends, and the "missing" stop symbol "3, 2, 9" is displayed in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, and the variable display is on hold. When 633a also disappears, the hold 3 is digested. At this time, character A and character B
However, by moving to a position that does not overlap with the stop symbol "3, 2, 9" or by erasing it, the first setting suggestion effect is also completed.

Next, in (C4), the same variation display as in (C2) is performed, and the digestion of Hold 2 is started. At this time, the variable hold display 633a indicating the hold (hold 2) related to the special figure change display game being executed is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. At this time, the special figure 1 hold number displayed by the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 is “2”.

In addition, when starting the digestion of Hold 2, the second setting suggestion effect is performed, three characters A (bear) are displayed, three characters B (frog) are displayed, and character C (tiger) is displayed. One is displayed.

After that, in (C5), the second variable display game ends, and the "missing" stop symbol "5, 7, 8" is displayed in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, and the variable display is on hold. When 633a also disappears, Hold 2 is digested. At this time, character A and character B
, Character C moves to a position that does not overlap with the stop symbol "5, 7, 8", or is erased, so that the second setting suggestion effect is also completed.

Next, in (C6), the same variation display as in (C2) and (C4) is performed, and the digestion of Hold 1 is started. At this time, hold (hold 1) related to the special figure fluctuation display game being executed.
The variable pending display 633a indicating is displayed in the reserved digestion area 640. In addition, special figure 1
The special figure 1 hold number displayed by the hold number display unit 650 is “1”.

In addition, when starting the digestion of Hold 1, the third setting suggestion effect is performed, 3 characters A (bear) are displayed, 5 characters B (frog) are displayed, and character C (tiger) is displayed. Four are displayed.

After that, in (C7), the third variable display game ends, and the "missing" stop symbol "4, 2, 1" is displayed in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, and the variable display is on hold. When 633a also disappears, Hold 1 is digested. At this time, character A and character B
, Character C moves to a position that does not overlap with the stop symbol "4, 2, 1", or is erased, so that the third setting suggestion effect is also completed.

Next, in (C8), the same variation display as in (C2), (C4) and (C6) is performed, and the digestion of hold 0 is started. At this time, the changing hold display 633a indicating the hold (hold 0) related to the special figure change display game being executed is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. At this time, the special figure 1 hold number displayed by the special figure 1 hold number display unit 650 is “0”.

In addition, when starting the digestion of hold 0, the fourth setting suggestion effect is performed, 3 characters A (bear) are displayed, 5 characters B (frog) are displayed, and character C (tiger) is displayed. Seven are displayed.

After that, in (C9), the fourth variable display game ends, and the "off" stop symbol "2, 6, 9" is displayed in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, and the variable display is on hold. With the disappearance of 633a, Hold 1 has been exhausted, and the character zone ends. At this time, the fourth setting suggestion effect is completed by deleting the characters A, B, and C.

[Other setting suggestion effects]
FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating an example of another setting suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 65, the setting suggestion effect may be executed on the display device 41 by the right-handed instruction display 620 of the hitting instruction display instead of the character. In this case, the higher the number of right-handed instruction displays 620, the higher the reliability of the high setting.

In addition, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a timing when the player can easily pay attention to the display device 41 even during the special figure variation display game. In the example of FIG. 65, when the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the special gaming state, such as during a big hit fanfare, the right-handed instruction display 620 executes the setting suggestion effect. In this way, by executing the setting suggestion effect at a timing that is easy for the player to pay attention to, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion effect from being overlooked. In addition, at the time of a big hit fanfare, a display 621 "Aim at the gate !!" is also displayed, which suggests to launch a game ball at the starting gate 34 of the normal figure by hitting right.

When a distribution gate for selecting the upper limit of the number of rounds of the jackpot is provided in the game area 32 on the right side, the display 621 may indicate that the distribution gate is aimed at instead of the normal start gate 34. Since the jackpot round does not start until the game ball passes through the distribution gate, it is possible to further prevent overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating another example of another setting suggestion effect. In the example of FIG. 66, an error that the player cannot intentionally cause and the game must be interrupted (here, a ball-out error).
Is generated, the setting suggestion effect is executed. Even in this way, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion effect from being overlooked by executing the setting suggestion effect at a timing that is easy for the player to pay attention to.

During the decorative special figure variation display game started in (D1) of FIG. 66, a ball out error occurs due to the detection of the shoot ball out switch signal as shown in (D2), and the error display 623 "ball out error" is displayed. Will be done. The character 625 is displayed together with the error display 623, and the reliability of the high setting is notified depending on the display mode (facial expression) of the character 625. Then (D3
), The character 625 is displayed together with the error release display 627 "the error has been cleared" indicating that the error has been cleared, and the display mode (facial expression) of the character 625.
Similarly, the reliability of the high setting is notified.

[Action / effect of the first embodiment]
According to the above, the game machine 10 of the first embodiment includes an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing an effect related to the variable display game that fluctuates and displays the identification information, and the stop result of the variable display game. Is a setting changing means (setting key switch 93) capable of changing a setting value (probability setting value) according to a setting related to the game in the game machine 10 capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the special result is obtained. , RAM initialization switch 112), and the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the setting suggestion effect that suggests the information (probability set value) regarding the set value a plurality of times in a predetermined period.

With the above configuration, the player is produced by performing the setting suggestion effect a plurality of times in a predetermined period (for example, a period of one variable display game or a period spanning a plurality of variable display games) in relation to the variable display game or the like. It is possible to focus on the game and enhance the interest of the game.

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the setting suggestion effect a plurality of times in one variable display game.

With the above configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect and concentrate on the game by increasing the degree of attention to one variable display game in which the setting suggestion effect is performed a plurality of times.

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the setting suggestion effect a plurality of times over a plurality of variable display games.

With the above configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect and concentrate on the game by performing the setting suggestion effect according to the timing of the effect performed over the plurality of variable display games such as the zone effect.

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) has such that the reliability of the suggestion of the setting suggestion effect executed later is higher than the reliability of the suggestion of the setting suggestion effect executed earlier. , Set multiple setting suggestion effects.

With the above configuration, by providing a difference in the reliability of the setting suggestion depending on the timing,
The player enjoys watching the production and waiting for the production of the setting suggestion to appear at a specific timing. Therefore, by increasing the expectation for the setting suggestion effect that appears next, the player can pay attention to the effect and can concentrate on the game.

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can notify the degree of expectation that the stop result of the variable display game will be a special result by making the setting suggestion effect appear, and the mode of the setting suggestion effect. The reliability of the suggestion of the setting suggestion effect is changed by the change of (such as increase in the number of characters).

With the above configuration, by associating the setting suggestion effect with the expectation of the special result (big hit), even a player who is playing the game without worrying about the probability set value can pay attention to the effect, and the mode of the setting suggestion effect. By associating the change of with the reliability of the setting suggestion, the player can pay attention to the production and can concentrate on the game.

In the first embodiment, a plurality of effect control means (effect control device 300) are displayed by displaying the same type of images (character A, character B, character C) on the display device 41 in a plurality of setting suggestion effects. The production modes of the setting suggestion effects of the times are related to each other.

With the above configuration, by displaying the same type of character multiple times in the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect performed multiple times is related to each other, and by paying attention to it, the setting suggestion can be grasped. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the production and to concentrate on the game.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing an effect related to the variable display game that displays the identification information in a variable manner, and the stop result of the variable display game is a special result. In the game machine 10 capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, the setting changing means (setting key switch 93, RAM initial) capable of changing the setting value (probability setting value) according to the setting related to the game. The effect control means (effect control device 300) is capable of executing a setting suggestion effect that suggests information (probability set value) regarding the set value, and by causing the setting suggestion effect to appear, a variable display is provided. It is characterized in that it is possible to notify the degree of expectation that the stop result of the game will be a special result.

With the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion effect from being overlooked by performing the setting suggestion effect associated with the expectation of the special result (big hit).

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the setting suggestion effect by displaying the characters (character A, character B, character C) on the display device 41.

With the above configuration, the setting suggestion effect can be performed in a simple and easy-to-identify manner.

[Second Embodiment]
A second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those in the first embodiment, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate. 2nd
The embodiment relates to a display probability set value and a display method thereof in a variable setting state (setting change mode).

[Work setting value, display probability setting value, effect control information]
FIG. 67 shows a work setting value and a display probability setting value of the game machine 10 of the second embodiment (setting example 1,
It is a table which shows the correspondence relationship between 2, 3, 4) and effect control information (effect set value, effect set value). Normally, the game control device 100 holds six work set values "0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" (set values), and corresponds to the probability set values (information about the set values). There is a big hit probability (
And information corresponding to the small hit probability)) "1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6" is provided. However, depending on the game machine 10, the jackpot probability (and the small hit probability) corresponding to different probability setting values
Are the same, and the number of setting types of display probability setting values may be less than six.
That is, in order to prevent confusion among the people involved in the hall, even if the probability setting values used or stored inside the game machine 10 are different, if the same big hit probability (and small hit probability) is used, the big hit probability (and small) Make the display probability setting value associated with (hit probability) the same. The same display probability setting value means the same jackpot probability (and small hit probability).

In the setting example 1 of FIG. 67, 1-6 are set as display probability setting values with respect to the work setting value 0-5, and the display probability setting values are set to different values. In the setting example 2, the case where all the display probability setting values corresponding to the six work setting values are set to "1" is shown. In the setting example 3, the display probability setting values corresponding to the work setting values "0", "1", and "2" are set to "1", respectively, and the work setting values "3", "4", and "2" are set. It represents the case where the display probability setting value corresponding to "5" is set to "2". In the setting example 4, the working setting values "0" and "1"
The display probability setting values corresponding to "" are set to "1", respectively, and the work setting values "2" and "3" are set.
It represents a case where the display probability setting value corresponding to is set to “2” and the display probability setting value corresponding to the work setting values “4” and “5” is set to “3” respectively.

In setting example 1, since the display probability setting value changes each time the RAM initialization switch 112 as the setting value change switch is pressed, the operator can operate the RAM initialization switch 112 by operating the game machine 10 (game control device 100). Can be identified as reacting.

On the other hand, in the setting example 2, regardless of the value of the work setting value, any display probability setting value is "1".
Therefore, the display of the display probability setting value is "1" before and after pressing the RAM initialization switch 112.
There is no change, and it is not possible for the operator to identify whether or not the display of the performance display device 152 (display unit) is responding to the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112. Further, also in the setting example 3, the working setting values are set from "0" to "1", "1" to "2", "3" to "4", and "4".
It is not possible to identify whether or not the game machine 10 (game control device 100) is reacting to the operation when changing from to "5". Further, also in the setting example 4, the working setting value is changed from "0" to "1".
, "2" to "3", and "4" to "5", it is not possible to identify whether or not the game machine 10 (game control device 100) is reacting to the operation.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, that is, every time the work setting value is changed, the display of the display probability setting value is temporarily displayed by the RAM initialization switch 11.
By displaying differently from before and after pressing 2, it is possible to identify whether or not the game machine 10 (game control device 100) is reacting to the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112.

[Probability setting change / confirmation process]
FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a procedure of probability setting change / confirmation processing of the game machine 10 of the second embodiment. The procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation process of the present embodiment is similar to that of the first embodiment, but before and after changing the work setting value (and the display probability setting value), intermediate data (intermediate) is used as the probability setting value display data. Information) is transmitted (displayed) to the performance display device 152.

As shown in FIG. 68, the work setting value in the work setting value area (in the RAM 111c or the register) is updated by +1 in the range of "0" to "5", and the probability setting value corresponds to the work setting value. After updating the probability setting values 1 to 6 in the area by +1 (A2410), intermediate data is set in the probability setting value display data area as the probability setting value display data (A2411), and the set probability setting value display data (intermediate data). ) Is output (A2412). In this case, the performance display device 152 is in a display mode based on the intermediate data until the next probability set value display data is output (A2404). If the time for displaying the intermediate data is short and the operator cannot recognize it, the timer for delaying a predetermined time may be activated after outputting the probability set value display data (intermediate data).

As a display mode of the intermediate data, an LED for displaying each digit of the 4-digit performance display device 152 (light emitting member: here, 8 segments a, b, c, d, e, f, g, Dp). ) Is turned off (FIGS. 69 and 70), and all the LEDs are turned on (FIG. 71).
), There is a display mode (FIG. 72) in which a part of the LED is lit at a specific position (different from the display mode showing the display probability setting value).

In addition, there is also a display mode in which the display of the display probability setting value is left as it is, and at least one LED having a digit different from the digit for displaying the display probability setting value is emitted (FIG. 73).

Further, during the setting change, the display probability setting value information transmitted (displayed) by the game control device 100 (FIG. 3) to the performance display device 152 includes LEDs (segments a and b) for displaying the display probability setting value. , C, d, e, f, g) as well as the lighting pattern data to light the L
Dot data (Dp) that lights the dot-shaped LED (segment Dp) at the lower right of the ED
= 1) (Additional information) is included. Therefore, as intermediate data, a display mode (FIG. 74) in which all the LEDs constituting the performance display device 152 including dots are turned off, segment Dp.
There is also a display mode (FIG. 75) in which all the other LEDs are turned off while maintaining the lighting of.

By the way, the game control device 100 transmits information on the work set value (probability set value) after the setting change to the effect control device 300 (FIG. 4) (FIGS. 6B and A1044), and transmits this to the effect control device 30 (FIG. 6B, A1044).
0 is received (FIG. 50, B1323) and can be used as an effect set value (effect set value). Then, as shown in FIG. 67, the effect control device 300 has a work set value “0”.
The effect control information "1" to "6" corresponding to "5" is provided as the effect setting value.
Here, the effect control device 300 can make the effect different contents based on the effect control information "1" to "6" as the effect set value. For example, in the variable effect setting process of FIG. 55, the effect content is set based on the set value. As a result, the interest in the game machine 10 can be improved by changing the effect control information each time the probability set value is changed to give variation to the effect.

[Display example of performance display device]
FIG. 69 is a schematic diagram showing a display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the game machine 10 of the second embodiment. The intermediate data in FIG. 69 is the LE that constitutes the performance display device 152.
It has a display mode in which all Ds are turned off.

Further, in the probability set value display data, the character "S" is in the digit 3 of the performance display device 152, and the digit 2 is ".
The LED lights up so that the letter "E" and the letter "T" appear in digit 1 (so that the letter "SET" appears), and the value of the current display probability setting value appears in digit 0. It has a display mode to be displayed. Further, in the probability setting value display data, the LEDs of the digit 1, the digit 2, and the digit 3 are turned off, and the current display probability setting value value appears in the digit 0 (may be displayed in another digit). LE
A display mode in which D is lit can also be provided.

As shown in FIG. 69, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on, the setting change mode (setting variable state) is set. In this case, the game control device 1
Probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of RAM 111c of 00 (here, any value of "1" to "6", which corresponds to the value obtained by adding 1 to the previous final work setting value. Is read, the character "S" is in digit 3 of the performance display device 152, the character "E" is in digit 2, and "" is in digit 1.
Each character "T" appears, and one type of display probability setting value "1" is lit and displayed at digit 0, and the character "SET1" is lit and displayed as a whole. When the variable setting state (setting change mode) is entered, the work setting value area (in the RAM 111c or the register) has a value (1 subtraction from the probability setting value) corresponding to the probability setting value read from the probability setting value area. Value) may be stored.

Then, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the value of the work set value is changed (for example, from "0" to "1"), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time. Alternatively, the display mode may be such that the display probability setting value "1" is temporarily turned off while the "SET" is kept lit.

Then, after the lapse of the predetermined time, the character "SET1" (there is no change in appearance) including the changed display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the changed work setting value (for example, "1"). Is lit and displayed.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed again, the work setting value is changed (for example, ""
1 ”to“ 2 ”), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time.

Then, after the lapse of the predetermined time, the character "SET1" (there is no change in appearance) including the changed display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the changed work setting value (for example, "2"). Is lit and displayed.

As described above, each time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the character "SET1" including the display probability setting value "1" can be identified so as to be temporarily turned off and then turned on again. , When the setting key switch 93 is turned off, all lights are turned off. Further, each time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the work setting value in the work setting value area is changed, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the work setting value is changed to the last updated work setting value. The corresponding probability setting value is stored in the probability setting value area.

FIG. 70 is a schematic diagram showing a display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 or the setting example 3 of the game machine 10 of the second embodiment.

First, in FIG. 70, the case where the display probability setting value is the setting example 3 and the work setting value at the start of setting change is “1” is considered for convenience.

When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 turned on,
The performance display device 152 (digit 0) has a display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the work setting value "1".
The character "SET1" including "" is lit and displayed.

Then, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the work setting value is changed (“1””.
(2)), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time.

Then, after the lapse of the predetermined time, the character "SET1" (the appearance does not change) including the changed display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the changed work setting value (for example, "2") It is lit and displayed.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed again, the value of the work set value is changed (from "2" to "3"), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time.

Then, after the elapse of a predetermined time, the character "SET2" including the display probability setting value "2" corresponding to the changed work setting value "3" is lit and displayed. This allows the operator to RAM
It can be visually recognized that the display probability setting value has been changed from "1" to "2" by pressing the initialization switch 112.

As described above, each time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the display probability setting value changes as the work setting value changes (1 → 1 → 2 → 2 → 2 → 1 → ...). When the value of the display probability setting value is switched, the light is temporarily turned off, then the next display probability setting value is displayed, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, all the lights are turned off.

Next, in FIG. 70, the case where the display probability setting value is the setting example 4 and the work setting value at the start of setting change is “0” is considered for convenience.

When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 turned on,
The performance display device 152 (digit 0) has a display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the work setting value "0".
The character "SET1" including "" is lit and displayed.

Then, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the work setting value is changed (“0””.
1), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time.

Then, after the lapse of the predetermined time, the character "SET1" (there is no change in appearance) including the changed display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the changed work setting value "1" is lit and displayed. To.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed again, the value of the work set value is changed (from "1" to "2"), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time.

Then, after the lapse of the predetermined time, the character "SET2" including the changed display probability setting value "2" corresponding to the changed work setting value "2" is lit and displayed. As a result, the operator can visually recognize that the display probability setting value has been changed from "1" to "2" by pressing the RAM initialization switch 112. After that, although not shown, the RAM initialization switch 112
When is pressed twice, the character "SET3" including the display probability setting value "3" corresponding to the work setting value "4" is lit and displayed.

As described above, each time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the display probability setting value changes as the work setting value changes (1 → 1 → 2 → 2 → 3 → 3 → 1 → ...・) Is changed. Further, when the value of the display probability set value is switched, all the LEDs are turned off for a predetermined time, and then the next display probability set value is turned on and displayed. Further, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, all the LEDs are turned off.

FIG. 71 is a schematic view showing a first modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the game machine 10 of the second embodiment. The modification described below will be described by taking Setting Example 2 as an example, but is also applicable to Setting Example 1, Setting Example 3, and Setting Example 4.

In the first modification, the intermediate data is the performance display device 1 as opposed to FIG. 69 (or FIG. 70).
All LEDs in digit 3, digit 2, digit 1, and digit 0 of 52 are lit and displayed (at least digit 3).
, Digit 2 and digit 1 may be lit and displayed). On the other hand, in the probability set value display data, all the LEDs are turned off in the digit 3, the digit 2, and the digit 1 of the performance display device 152 (may be a mode in which the characters "SET" are displayed as described above), and in the digit 0. It has a display mode in which the LEDs constituting the display of the display probability set value are turned on.

The display mode of the display probability set value in the first modification transitions in the same manner as in FIG. 70. On the other hand, R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is pressed, all the LEDs of the predetermined time, the digit 3, the digit 2, the digit 1, and the digit 0 are turned on by the intermediate data, and then the changed display probability setting value is displayed.

Therefore, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the lighting display of the display probability setting value of digit 0 disappears for a predetermined time, and instead, all the LEDs of digit 3, digit 2, digit 1, and digit 0 are turned on. Lights up for a predetermined time.

FIG. 72 is a schematic view showing a second modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the game machine 10 of the second embodiment. The second modification shown in FIG. 72 transitions in the same manner as the display mode shown in FIG. 69 except for the display mode of the intermediate data. On the other hand, the intermediate data is displayed in the same digit (digit 0) as the display probability setting value, and has a display mode different from the display probability setting value before the change and the display probability setting value after the change.

As shown in FIG. 72, the intermediate data has, for example, a display mode in which only the LED (segment g) having digit 0 is turned on. In addition, in the second modification, any display mode other than the display indicating the display probability setting value can be applied. Further, other digits (digit 3, digit 2, digit 1) may also be arbitrarily displayed by intermediate data.

Therefore, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the lighting display of the display probability setting value of digit 0 disappears for a predetermined time, and instead, the LED at a specific position of digit 0 (for example, segment g)
Lights up for a predetermined time.

FIG. 73 is a schematic view showing a third modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the game machine 10 of the second embodiment. The third modification shown in FIG. 73 transitions in the same manner as the display mode shown in FIG. 69 except for the display mode of the intermediate data. On the other hand, the intermediate data is also displayed in a digit (digit 3, digit 2, digit 1) different from the digit (digit 0) in which the display probability setting value is displayed, and in digit 0, the display probability setting value is displayed. The display is maintained. That is, the intermediate data is different from the display probability setting value before the change and the display probability setting value after the change as a whole, but the digit for displaying the display probability setting value is the display probability setting value before the change. It is a display mode in which information is shared.

In the third modification, the game control device 100 has information on the display probability setting value (digit 0) stored in the probability setting value display data area and intermediate data (digit 3, digit 2, digits 2) related to the third modification. Digit 1
) Is synthesized and the synthesized data (intermediate data) is set in the probability setting value display data area as the probability setting value display data (executed in FIG. 68, A2411).

As shown in FIG. 73, the intermediate data has a display mode in which all the LEDs of the digit 3, the digit 2, and the digit 1 are turned on, and the composite data includes all the digits 3, the digit 2, and the digit 1. LED
Is lit, and the LED for displaying the display probability set value before the change is lit at digit 0. In the probability set value display data, the probability set value is lit and displayed in digit 0, and digits 3 and 2 are displayed.
Although the digit 1 has a display mode in which the light is turned off, the characters "SET" may be displayed in the same manner as described above.

Therefore, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, all the LEDs of the digit 3, the digit 2, and the digit 1 are lit for a predetermined time, and the lighting display of the display probability set value during that period is also maintained.

FIG. 74 is a schematic view showing a fourth modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the game machine 10 of the second embodiment. The fourth modification shown in FIG. 74 transitions in the same manner as the display mode shown in FIG. 69 except for the display based on the display probability setting value (additional information).

In the fourth modification, the game control device 100 is the RAM initialization switch 11 as described above.
2 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on and the power is turned on to the game machine 10, so that the setting variable state (first state) is set. At this time, the game control device 100 adds dot data (Dp = 1) (additional information) to the probability set value display data. As a result, it can be indicated that the displayed display probability setting value "1." is a provisional value whose setting is being changed.

On the other hand, the intermediate data includes a display mode in which all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off. Therefore, every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the performance display device 152
LED for displaying "SET" of digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1, and probability setting value "1" for displaying digit 0.
The LED that displays "" and the LED that displays the dot of digit 0 (segment Dp) are turned off for a predetermined time.

By turning off the setting key switch 93, the setting is completed (second state). At this time, the game control device 100 indicates the probability setting value display data (digit 3, digit 2, digit 1) indicating the display probability setting value (including dot data (Dp = 0)) after the setting is changed (after confirmation). SET "
By setting the probability setting display data area to display the display probability setting value "1" after the setting change, the display probability setting value "1" is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the display probability setting value "1" is displayed. Turns off the lighting display.

FIG. 75 is a schematic view showing a fifth modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the game machine 10 of the second embodiment. The fifth modification shown in FIG. 75 transitions in the same manner as the display mode of the fourth modification shown in FIG. 74, except for the display by the intermediate data.

On the other hand, as intermediate data, an LED displaying "SET" of digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1 and digit 0
The LED that displays the probability setting value for display is turned off, and the dot data (Dp = 1) (additional information)
It has a display mode in which an LED (segment Dp) for displaying is lit. Therefore, RAM
Each time the initialization switch 112 is pressed, the LED displaying the characters "SET" of the digit 3, the digit 2, and the digit 1 and the LED displaying the display probability setting value of the digit 0 are turned off in the performance display device 152. , The lighting of the LED (segment Dp) that displays the dot of digit 0 is maintained. Therefore, it can be easily identified that the display of the performance display device 152 is reacting in response to the operation and the setting is being changed.

[Action / effect of the second embodiment]
The present embodiment includes a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game (a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed based on the establishment of a start condition), and when the result of the game is a special result, In the game machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player,
It is set by making the setting change means (RAM initialization switch 112, setting key switch 93) that can change the setting value (work setting value, probability setting value) according to the setting related to the game, and the light emitting member (LED) to emit light. A display unit (performance display device 152) capable of displaying information related to values (information corresponding to the jackpot probability, display probability setting value) is provided, and the setting changing means is a setting value (setting value (
A first switch (RAM initialization switch 112) for changing the work setting value) is provided, and the game control means (game control device 100) is a first switch (RAM initialization switch 11).
The setting value (working setting value) is changed in response to the operation of 2), and the information (display probability setting value) related to the changed setting value can be displayed on the display unit (performance display device 152). When changing the value (working setting value), intermediate information (intermediate data) that is different from the information about the setting value before the change (probability setting value for display) and the information about the setting value after the change (probability setting value for display). )
Is displayed on the display unit (performance display device 152), and then information (display probability setting value) regarding the changed set value is displayed on the display unit (performance display device 152).

With the above configuration, intermediate data whose display mode is different from the information (display probability setting value) related to the setting value before and after the change is temporarily displayed before and after the change of the probability setting value, so that the operator can change the setting. It is possible to identify whether or not the display of the display unit (performance display device 152) is responding to the operation of the operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112).

In the present embodiment, the information regarding the set value (display probability set value) is the same regardless of the set value (working set value), and is information corresponding to the probability value at which the game has a special result.

In the above configuration, there is no change in the information related to the set value (probability setting value for display) before and after pressing the operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112), but since the above intermediate data is displayed, the operation unit (RAM initial) Display unit (performance display device 15) corresponding to the operation of the conversion switch 112)
It is possible to identify whether or not the display of 2) is responding.

In the present embodiment, the intermediate information (intermediate data) is characterized by information for turning off all the light emitting members (LEDs) or information for turning on all the light emitting members.

With the above configuration, it is possible to easily identify the change from the information regarding the setting value before the change (probability setting value for display) to the information regarding the setting value after the change (probability setting value for display).

In the present embodiment, the display unit (performance display device 152) has a plurality of digits and intermediate information (intermediate information (performance display device 152).
(Intermediate data) is displayed in a digit different from the digit for displaying the information (display probability setting value) related to the set value.

With the above configuration, the display of the intermediate data indicates that the display unit (performance display device 152) is responding to the operation, and the information on the set value (probability setting value for display) is not deleted, so the information on the set value (for display). It is possible to avoid a decrease in visibility of the probability set value).

In the present embodiment, the display unit (performance display device 152) has additional information (Dp =) that is different from the information regarding the set value (display probability set value) and the information regarding the set value (display probability set value).
1) and are displayable, and the setting changing means (RAM initialization switch 112, setting key switch 93) is the first to shift to a setting variable state in which the setting value (working setting value) can be changed. The second switch (setting key switch 93) includes two switches (setting key switch 93), and the second switch (setting key switch 93) has a first state that allows the transition to the setting variable state and a second state that terminates the setting variable state. The state can be changed, and the game control means (game control device 100) transmits (displays) additional information (Dp = 1) together with information related to the set value (display probability set value) in the first state. Stop the transmission (display) of additional information in the second state (dot data (Dp)
= 0) is transmitted), and the intermediate information (intermediate data) is additional information (dot data (Dp = 1)).
Including.

With the above configuration, even if the operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) is pressed during the setting change, the LED (segment Dp) indicating that the setting is being changed is maintained without turning off, so that the setting is being changed. It is possible to improve the reliability of the display indicating.

In the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 30) for controlling the effect related to the game.
0) is provided, the effect control means (effect control device 300) controls the effect based on the set value (working set value), and the game control means (game control device 100) has the changed set value (game control device 100). Information on the final work set value and probability set value) is transmitted to the effect control means (effect control device 300).

With the above configuration, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the changed set value, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the game machine 10 by giving variation to the effect.

[Third Embodiment]
A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first embodiment and the second embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate. The third embodiment relates to accepting an input in a setting change state.

[Probability setting change / confirmation process]
First, the probability setting change / confirmation process according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting change / confirmation process according to the third embodiment.

In the probability setting change / confirmation process according to the third embodiment, the probability setting change according to the first embodiment /
In addition to the confirmation process, the processes of A2601 and A2602 are added.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input of a predetermined switch after performing the processes of steps A2401 to A2410 as described above in the probability setting change / confirmation process according to the first embodiment (A2601). ). The input of the predetermined switch is, for example, the input of the start port switch (start port 1 switch 36a, start port 2 switch 37a), the gate switch 34a, and the winning port switches 35a to 35n. It should be noted that the input of the predetermined switch is an interface chip (proximity I / F) such as a specific area switch 72, a large winning port switch 43 of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39, a remaining ball discharge port switch 73, and an out ball detection switch 74. ) 12
You may include the one entered in 1 (see FIG. 3).

When there is an input of a predetermined switch (the result of A2601 is "Y"), the game control device 1
00 executes the process corresponding to the switch input (A2602), and ends the probability setting change / confirmation process.

In the process corresponding to the switch input (A2602), the game control device 100 transmits a switch input command indicating that the switch input has been made to the effect control device 300. Further, the effect control device 300 lights the start port LED and the like by receiving the switch input command from the game control device 100 by the process of step B3302 of the single-shot command process described later. Similarly, in the game control device 100, the second driver 138b and the third driver 138
An on / off drive signal may be output to the batch display device 50 via c to light the batch display device 50.

On the other hand, if there is no input of a predetermined switch (the result of A2601 is "N"), the game control device 100 ends the probability setting change / confirmation process as it is.

[Single-shot command processing]
FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a procedure of single-shot command processing according to the third embodiment.

In addition to the single-shot command processing according to the first embodiment, the processing of B3301 and B3302 is added to the single-shot command processing according to the third embodiment.

The effect control device 300 performs the processes from step B1301 to step B1327 as described above in the single-shot command process according to the first embodiment, and then if the MODE unit does not represent a setting confirmation command (B1327). The result of is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of the switch input command (B3301). When the MODE unit is within the range of the switch input command, the effect control device 300 means that the switch input command is received from the game control device 100, and determines that there is a switch input.

When the MODE unit represents a switch input command (the result of B3301 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 executes the switch input processing (B3302), and then ends the single-shot command processing.

In the switch input processing (B3302), the effect control device 300 lights the start port LED or displays a check item on the display screen of the display device 41 by receiving the switch input command. When the effect control device 300 receives the switch input command, the decorative LED is sequentially turned on, and the movable accessory and the speaker 19 (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 1) are turned on.
9b) may be operated.

On the other hand, when the MODE unit does not represent the switch input command (the result of B3301 is "N"), the effect control device 300 is set to step B1329 or later as described above in the single-shot command processing according to the first embodiment. Proceed with the processing of.

[Hall / player setting mode processing]
The details of the hall / player setting mode process (B0011) in the above-mentioned main process (FIG. 47) will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hall / player setting mode processing according to the third embodiment. Hall / player setting mode processing activates the hall setting mode in which the person in charge of the hall (game store) can make various settings for the game machine 10, or the player setting mode in which the player can make various settings for the game machine 10. be able to.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the hall setting mode is in progress (B0401).
). When the hole setting mode flag described later is set, it can be determined that the hall setting mode is in progress. When in the hall setting mode (the result of B0401 is "Y"), B0
After processing 406-B0416, the production button 25 by the person in charge of the hall (game store) (
Various settings and various adjustments are made based on the operations of the effect button switch 25a and the touch panel 25b).

When the effect control device 300 is not in the hall setting mode (the result of B0401 is "N").
), It is determined whether or not the player setting mode is in progress (B0402). When the player setting mode flag described later is set, it can be determined that the player setting mode is in progress. When in the player setting mode (the result of B0402 is "Y"), the processing of B0420-B0425 is performed, and various settings and various adjustments are made based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player.

When the effect control device 300 is not in the player setting mode (the result of B0402 is "N").
), It is determined whether or not the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (B0403). For example, when the operation of the effect button 25 for entering the hall setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010) while waiting for a customer or in the setting change state, the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied. It can be determined that it has been done. Note that waiting for customers is, for example, a state in which a video for waiting for customers (customer waiting demo) is displayed on the display device 41. Further, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is open during the setting change state (when an error related to the front frame open error / an illegal command is received (B1316)), the effect button input process (B0010) )
When the operation of the effect button 25 is detected as an operation signal, the hall setting mode may be entered. When the hole setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B0403 is "N"), the process of B0417 is executed.

The effect control device 300 draws a screen for starting screen drawing (drawing of the hall setting screen) for the display device 41 in the hall setting mode when the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B0403 is “Y”). Set the start (B0404). Then, the flag in the hall setting mode is set (B0405).

Next, the effect control device 300 adjusts and sets the volumes of the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the person in charge of the hall.
B0406), Hall LED brightness adjustment processing (B0407) that adjusts and sets the LED brightness of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and the liquid crystal brightness that adjusts and sets the brightness of the display unit (liquid crystal display, etc.) of the display device 41. The adjustment process (B0408) and the power saving setting process (B0409) for setting the power saving are executed. The setting values related to the speaker volume, the LED brightness, the brightness of the display device 41, and the power saving setting are the setting values in the hall setting mode.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes a logo color setting process for setting the issue color of the logo accessory (B0410). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation input (B0411).
). The operation signal by the setting confirmation operation of the effect button 25 is the effect button input process (B0010).
If it is detected in, it can be determined that the setting confirmation operation input has been made. When there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B0411 is "N"), the hall / player setting mode processing is terminated.

The effect control device 300 receives a setting confirmation operation input (the result of B0411 is "Y").
), It is determined whether or not it is confirmed by the factory setting (B0412). When the effect button 25 is not operated other than the setting confirmation operation, it can be determined that the setting is confirmed by the factory default setting. If it is not confirmed by the factory default setting (the result of B0412 is "N"), the process proceeds to B0414. When the factory default setting is confirmed (the result of B0412 is "Y"), the factory default setting process for performing various settings and various adjustments with the factory default setting is executed (B0413). The factory default settings are the default settings stored in a memory such as ROM 321. Next, Hall setting data (or Hall adjustment data) such as volume and various brightness determined by B0406-B0410 and B0413 are written to the backup memory (for example, FeRAM323) (B0414).

Next, the effect control device 300 sets the screen drawing end setting for ending the screen drawing on the display device 41 in the hall setting mode (B0415). Then, the flag in the hole setting mode is cleared (B0416).

When the hall setting mode start condition is not satisfied, the effect control device 300 (B040)
The result of 3 is "N"), and it is determined whether or not the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (B0417).
). It can be determined that the player setting mode start condition is satisfied when the operation of the effect button 25 for entering the player setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010) while waiting for a customer. When the player setting mode start condition is not satisfied (B)
The result of 0417 is "N"), and the hall / player setting mode processing is completed.

When the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B0417 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the screen drawing start setting for starting the screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode (the result of B0417 is “Y”). B0418). Then, the player setting mode flag is set (B0419).

Next, the effect control device 300 includes a player volume adjustment process (B0420) for adjusting the volumes of the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player, and the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration. The player LED brightness adjustment process (B0421) for adjusting the LED brightness of the device 46 is executed.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes an effect customization process described later (B0422), which customizes (individually sets) the effect based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the like by the player.
Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation input (B0423). When there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B0423 is "N"), the hall / player setting mode processing is terminated.
When there is a setting confirmation operation input (the result of B0423 is "Y"), the screen drawing end setting for ending the screen drawing for the display device 41 in the player setting mode is performed (B042).
4). Then, the player setting mode flag is cleared (B0425). In addition, B042
The player setting data (or player adjustment data) such as the volume and brightness determined in 0-B0421 may be erased and is not written to the backup memory.

In the above, the drawing update setting (update of the highlight item in the menu display, etc.) after once entering the hall setting mode or the player setting mode is the effect button input process (B).
0010) shall be used.

[Game board whose settings are being changed]
FIG. 79 is a front view of the game board 30 in the setting change state according to the third embodiment.

On the game board 30 (including the center case 40) according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79, LEDs (light emitting diodes) of the board decoration device 46 capable of emitting light are provided in front of the start gate 34 in the normal drawing. It is provided in front of the general winning opening 35 and in front of each. The LED provided in front of the normal drawing start gate 34 is the normal drawing start gate LED 34L, and the LED provided in front of each general winning opening 35 is the general winning opening LED 35L.

When the effect control device 300 according to the third embodiment receives the command for which the probability setting is being changed, the display screen of the display device 41 indicates that the setting is being changed. Display characters (B1326 setting change information setting process).

Here, when the game control device 100 is in the setting change state (setting variable state, setting change mode), as described above in FIG. 76, the probability setting change / confirmation process steps A2601 and A2
In the process of 602, the gate switch 34a is an input different from the input related to the change of the set value.
It functions as a control means capable of accepting inputs from the winning opening switches 35a to 35n.
Then, the game control device 100 includes a gate switch 34a and a winning opening switch 35a to 35n.
When the input from is received, the switch input command corresponding to the received input is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Then, the effect control device 300 is set in step B3301 of the single-shot command processing of FIG. 77.
When a switch input command from the game control device 100 is received in the process of B3302, the LED of the board decoration device 46 corresponding to the switch input command (normal drawing start gate LED 34).
L and general winning opening LED35L) are lit or blinked.

Therefore, in the setting change state, by passing or winning the game ball through the normal drawing start gate 34 or each general winning opening 35, the corresponding normal drawing starting gate LED 34L or the general winning opening LED 35L is lit or blinks. The operation can be easily checked and the maintainability of the game machine 10 can be improved. As a result, for example, the operation of the gaming machine 10 can be easily confirmed at the time of shipment from the factory, so that the initially defective gaming machine 10 can be detected at an early stage.

The effect control device 300 is the LE of the board decoration device 46 corresponding to the switch input command.
After lighting or blinking D (normal drawing start gate LED 34L or general winning opening LED 35L), other LEDs that do not correspond may be turned on or blinking in order. According to such an aspect, the operation check of the LED of various board decoration devices 46 can be easily performed only by receiving one of the switch input commands from the game control device 100, so that the maintenance of the game machine 10 can be performed. The sex can be improved.

Further, the game control device 100 includes a gate switch 34a and a winning opening switch 35a to 35n.
Display units 51 to 60 (LED) of the batch display device 50 in response to the reception of input from
Lamp, special figure 1 display 51, special figure 2 display 52, normal figure display 53, special figure 1 hold display 54
, Special figure 2 hold display 55, normal figure hold display 56, first game state display 57, second game state display 58, third game state display 59, round display 60) are lit or blinked as appropriate. You may let me. The game control device 100 lights or blinks the display unit (any of the display units 51 to 60) of the batch display device 50 corresponding to the received input, and then all the display units (display units 51 to 60). May be turned on or blinked so that the operation of the entire display units 51 to 60 of the batch display device 50 can be checked (processing of A2602). Further, the operation check of the entire display units 51 to 60 of the batch display device 50 is not limited to the mode of all lighting or all blinking, and may be a mode of circulating lighting so that it is easy to confirm that the light is normally emitted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 79, when the effect control device 300 receives the switch input command from the game control device 100 and performs the switch input time processing (B3302), the display device 41
A checklist may be displayed on the display screen of. In the checklist, for example, a normal operation checked display such as "○" is displayed in the item of each switch corresponding to the received input.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 79, the effect control device 300 starts the checklist in response to the game control device 100 receiving the input of the start port switch (start port 1 switch 36a, start port 2 switch 37a). Normal operation checked display (“○”) in the items of port 1 and start port 2
May be displayed.

Further, an LED (starting winning opening LED36L) of the board decoration device 46 is provided in front of the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1, first starting winning area), and the LED is turned on according to the corresponding switch input command. Alternatively, it may be made to blink. Further, the effect control device 300 is
Speaker 19 (upper speaker 1) as a production device according to the corresponding switch input command
9a, lower speaker 19b) may be operated. At that time, for example, when the effect control device 300 receives the switch input command corresponding to the gate switch 34a, the effect control device 300 can make a voice notification of "Public figure start gate!", And receives the switch input command corresponding to the winning opening switches 35a to 35n. You can make a voice notification saying "General winning opening!".

Further, during the setting change, the game control device 100 receives a signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64, which is output when the front frame 12 and the like are open, and issues an error / illegal command to the effect control device 300. When the effect control device 300 receives the operation of the effect button 25 during transmission, the effect control device 300 says that the process of step B0403 of the hall / player setting mode process is established as described above in FIG. 78. Judgment (The result of B0403 is "Y"
).

Therefore, since the effect control device 300 executes the processes after step B0404, the hall can be set while the setting is changed. In this way, the game control device 100
Functions as a control means that can accept a signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64 as an input different from the input related to the change of the set value when the setting is changed. Further, the effect control device 300 accepts the operation of the effect button 25 with the front frame 12 and the like open, and receives the input related to the hall setting as an input different from the input related to the change of the set value during the setting change state. It functions as a control means capable of changing the set value of the hall setting (for example, the volume of the speaker, the brightness of the LED, etc.).

[Another example of a game board whose settings are being changed]
FIG. 80 is another example of the front view of the game board 30 whose settings are being changed according to the third embodiment.

In another example of the game board 30, as shown in FIG. 80, in the effect control device 300, in addition to the general drawing start gate LED 34L, the general winning opening LED 35L, and the starting winning opening LED 36L, the general drawing variation winning LED 37L and the first special variation The winning LED 38L and the second special variable winning LED 39L are also made to emit light. The normal variable winning LED 37L is an LED provided in front of the normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 2, second starting winning opening). The first special variable winning LED 38L is an LED provided in front of the first special variable winning device 38, and the second special variable winning LED 39L is an LED provided in front of the second special variable winning device 39.

The normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38, and the second special variable winning device 39 whose settings are being changed are closed by a slide opening / closing movable member 37b and attacker-type opening / closing doors 38c and 39c, respectively.

Therefore, for example, the effect control device 300 lights or blinks the normal figure variation winning LED 37L, the first special variation winning LED 38L, and the second special variation winning LED 39L in response to the pressing of the effect button 25 or the like during the setting change. Can be made to. In addition, the general figure fluctuation prize LED3
The lighting of the 7L, the first special variation winning LED 38L, the second special variation winning LED 39L, and the like may be performed in order or at the same time.

Further, the game control device 100 opens the movable member 37b and the opening / closing doors 38c and 39c when there is an input of a predetermined switch (the result of A2601 is "Y"), and the normal variable winning device 37 or the first The game ball may be directly won in the 1 special variable winning device 38 and the 2nd special variable winning device 39.

Further, in the game board 30 of another example, the effect control device 300 can emit light of the upper effect unit LED 40 cL and the side effect unit LED 40 dL, which are the LEDs of the board decoration device 46. The upper effect unit LED 40cL is an L provided in the upper effect unit 40c.
It is ED. The side effect unit LED 40dL is an LED provided on the blade portion of the sword possessed by the character of the side effect unit 40d. The effect control device 300 lights or blinks the upper effect unit LED 40 cL and the side effect unit LED 40 dL, for example, in response to the effect button 25 or the like being pressed while the setting is being changed. The upper production unit LED
The lighting of 40 cL and the side effect unit LED 40 dL may be performed in order or at the same time.

In this way, by emitting the LED of the accessory (decorative member) in addition to the LED of the winning opening and the winning device, the operation check of the LED of the accessory (decorative member) can be easily performed. Maintainability can be improved. It should be noted that the maintainability may be further improved by moving a movable accessory or the like as a production device at the time of light emission so that it can be confirmed whether the motor of the movable accessory or the like moves normally.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with a lamp display device 80 (lamp display units 1 to 1) provided on the lower right side of the game area 32 in response to pressing the effect button 25 or the like while changing the setting, for example.
6 (LED)) may be combined to emit light.

[Action / effect of the third embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment has identification information (identification information, decorative special symbol, decorative first symbol A to
When the stop result of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) that fluctuates the C, this special figure) becomes a special result (big hit result), a special gaming state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player is generated. It is possible. The game machine 10 is a control means for controlling the game (game control device 100,
The effect control device 300) and setting changing means (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112) capable of changing the setting value related to the game condition are provided. The control means can accept an input different from the input related to the change of the set value when the set value can be changed by the setting change means in the setting change state (setting variable state, setting change mode).

According to such a game machine 10, when the setting value can be changed in the setting change state, the control means can accept the input related to the management and maintenance of the game machine 10 such as the hall setting and the operation check. It is possible to improve the manageability and maintainability of the game machine 10.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the third embodiment, the control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) is a predetermined input (front frame open) as an input different from the input related to the change of the set value during the setting change state. When the signal from the detection switch 64 and the signal from the effect button 25 are received, it is possible to change the set value as well as the set value (set value in the hall setting) different from the set value during the setting change state.

According to such a game machine 10, the setting value of the hall setting can be changed as a setting value different from the setting value related to the game condition when the setting is changed, so that the person in charge of the game hall (game store) It is possible to improve the maintainability by the above. In addition, since the setting change state is usually changed by the operation of the person in charge of the game hall (game store), the setting value of the hall setting can be changed in the setting change state, so that the game hall can be changed. It is possible to prevent the setting value of the hall setting from being unnecessarily changed by a person who is not responsible for.

Further, the game machine 10 of the third embodiment is a light emitting device capable of emitting light (LED of the board decoration device 46 (LED).
In particular, in addition to the first start winning opening 36 and the LED in front of the second starting winning opening), the batch display device 50
51-60), a predetermined area provided in the game area 32 where the game ball can enter or pass, and a detection means capable of detecting the entry or passage of the game ball into the predetermined area. .. When the control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) receives an input from the detection means as different inputs, the control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) causes the light emitting device to emit light.

According to such a game machine 10, it is possible to easily check the operation of various detection means that can normally detect the game ball and that the various light emitting devices emit light normally when the setting is changed. The maintainability of the machine 10 can be improved.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the third embodiment, a plurality of light emitting devices (LEDs and the like of the board decoration device 46, etc.) are provided. The control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) is
The display of the plurality of light emitting devices can be sequentially changed to a predetermined display mode (for example, light emission) during the setting change state.

According to such a game machine 10, for example, the effect control device 300 simply receives one of the switch input commands from the game control device 100, and various light emitting devices (board decoration device 46) are in the setting change state. Since the operation check of the LED and the effect device) can be easily performed, the maintainability of the game machine 10 can be improved.

Further, the game machine 10 of the third embodiment is provided in a game area 32 with an effect device (display device 41, board decoration device 46, lamp display device 80, etc.) capable of displaying a display related to the effect, and a game ball is provided. Predetermined areas where balls can be entered or passed (general drawing start gate 34, each general winning opening 35, first starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area), second starting winning opening (second starting) of the normal variable winning device 37 (Winning area), etc.) and detection means (gate switch 34a, winning port switches 35a to 35n, starting port switch, etc.) capable of detecting the entry or passage of a game ball into a predetermined area. When the control means receives an input from the detection means as a different input, the display of the effect device can be changed to a predetermined display mode (LED light emission, display of normal operation checked display on the checklist).

According to such a game machine 10, for example, when the setting is changed, the game ball is passed or entered into the normal drawing start gate 34, each general winning opening 35, or the like as a predetermined area. Since the start gate LED 34L and the general winning opening LED 35L can be lit or blinked, and a checklist for passing or entering a ball can be displayed on the display device 41, it is possible to easily check the operation and improve the maintainability of the game machine 10. Can be done. As a result, for example, the operation of the gaming machine 10 can be easily confirmed at the time of shipment from the factory, so that the initially defective gaming machine 10 can be detected at an early stage.

Further, the game machine 10 of the third embodiment has an upper effect of the effect device (display device 41, LED of the board decoration device 46, the speaker 19, and the board effect device 44 (movable accessory, etc.)) capable of performing the effect. A unit 40c, a side effect unit 40d, etc.) are provided. Control means (effect control device 300
) Can operate the effect device when the setting is changed.

According to such a game machine 10, for example, as a production device, the LED of the board decoration device 46
By notifying the sound from the speaker 19 in addition to the light emission of the above and moving a movable accessory or the like as a production device at the time of light emission, the speaker is checked for the operation of the LED of the board production device 44 when the setting is changed. It is possible to easily check the operation of motors such as 19 and movable accessories, and further improve the maintainability of the game machine 10.

[Fourth Embodiment]
A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 86. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to third embodiments. Moreover, in the following embodiment,
The same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to third embodiments, and duplicate descriptions will be omitted as appropriate. The fourth embodiment relates to the operation of the gaming machine 10 when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state and the power is restored.

[Timing chart in the special game state of normal operation]
First, with reference to FIG. 81, the timing of signal output and the like in the special gaming state of normal operation will be described in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 81 is a timing chart showing an example of timing of signal output or the like in a special gaming state of normal operation according to the fourth embodiment.

First, as shown in FIG. 81, when the first big hit (special game state) occurs at time t1, external information is displayed in the special figure 1 display processing (FIG. 37) or the special figure 2 display processing (FIG. 38). As signals related to the start of the jackpot (special game state) saved in the output data area, for example, one jackpot signal and two jackpot signals are output. The signal relating to the start of the jackpot is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and thus to an external device (such as a hall computer). Specifically, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are started to be output when the stop result (display result) of the variable display game becomes the jackpot result (special result). The game machine 10
The power of the is kept on and the security signal is off.

The jackpot 1 signal is processed during special figure 1 display when the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (FIG. 37).
) Fanfare / Inter-interval processing If the transition setting process (A5714) is saved in the external information output data area, or if the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the special figure 2 display process (Fig. 38) fanfare / It is saved in the external information output data area in the process transition setting process (A5816) during the interval. If the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the big hit 2 signal is saved in the external information output data area in step A5709 of the special figure 1 display processing (FIG. 37), or the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit. In the case of, special figure 2 display processing (Fig. 38)
) Is saved in the external information output data area in step A5811.

When the first jackpot ends at time t2, the output of the jackpot 1 signal is turned off. Specifically, for the output of one jackpot signal, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area by the end of the special gaming state, that is, the jackpot end processing (FIGS. 40 and 41) after the round game. Then it turns off. On the other hand, after the end of the first big hit, the time is shortened (general electric support state, specific game state) or probability change state (specific game state, probability fluctuation state), and the output of the big hit 2 signal remains on. Will be done.

Specifically, when the off data of the jackpot 1 signal is the end of the jackpot by the special figure 1 variable display game, the jackpot 1 signal is turned off, so that step A6112 of the special figure 1 jackpot end process (FIG. 40) Is saved in the external information output data area. Further, when the off-data of the jackpot 1 signal is the end of the jackpot by the special figure 2 variation display game, the jackpot 1 signal is turned off, so that the external information is obtained in step A6212 of the special figure 2 jackpot end process (FIG. 41). Saved in the output data area.

When the jackpot 2 signal is in the time saving state after the jackpot ends, it is saved in the external information output data area in step A6501 of the jackpot end setting process 2 and the output (on state) continues.
Further, when the jackpot 2 signal is in a probable change state after the jackpot ends, the jackpot end setting process 3
In step A6801, the data is saved in the external information output data area and the output (on state) continues.

Subsequently, at time t3, when a big hit occurs again, that is, when a second big hit occurs, the output of one big hit signal is turned on.

Then, at time t4, when the second big hit is completed, the output of the big hit 1 signal is turned off. Further, the second big hit corresponds to a normal big hit symbol (for example, a 10R normal big hit symbol), and the time reduction determination data is data with a time reduction, and there is no specific area passage information (
The result of A6104 is "N") (no V prize), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is executed (A6).
103). Therefore, after the end of the second big hit, the time is shortened (Public electricity support state).

After that, at time t5, when the variation display game in the time saving state reaches, for example, 100 times after the end of the second big hit, the number of remaining games in the time saving state (the number of time saving fluctuations) becomes 0 and the time saving state ends. To do. At that time, the output of the jackpot 2 signals is turned off by saving the off data of the jackpot 2 signals in the external information output data area in step A5105 of the time reduction fluctuation number update process. Further, when a game including a special game state or the like is performed in the normal operation in this way, the power supply of the game machine 10 is maintained in the on state, and the security signal remains off.

In addition, unlike the above, when the probability change state is reached after the end of the second big hit, the probability change state ends when the fall lottery is won in the fall lottery process (FIG. 20), and at that time, the output of the big hit 2 signal is output. By saving the off-data of 2 jackpot signals in the external information output data area (
A3704), it turns off.

[Timing chart for normal recovery after a power failure in a special game state]
With reference to FIG. 82, in the fourth embodiment, the timing of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state and the power is restored to normal will be described. FIG. 82 is a timing chart showing an example of timing such as signal output when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state according to the fourth embodiment and normal recovery is performed by power recovery. In the following FIGS. 82 to 86, the contents overlapping with the contents described in FIGS. 81 and the like will be omitted as appropriate.

At time t1, when the first big hit (special game state) occurs, as in FIG. 81 described above, one big hit signal and two big hit signals are output. In addition, the security signal remains off.

When a power failure occurs during the first big hit (for example, during a round game) at time t11, FIG.
As shown in 2, the power of the game machine 10 is turned off, and the jackpot game is interrupted. Further, as the power of the game machine 10 is turned off, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are also turned off.

When the power is restored (power failure recovery) and the power of the game machine 10 is turned on at time t12, the game machine 10 is normally restored to the state before the power failure by the power failure recovery process (A1045) of the main process. The output state (on state) of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal is saved (stored) in the RAM at the time of power failure (A1057, A1058), and the game control device 100 has the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal at the time of power recovery. Saved data (stored information) about the output state, that is, the jackpot state is held (maintained) inside. Therefore, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal that were on before the power failure are turned on, and the first jackpot game is restarted.

When the first jackpot ends at time t13, the output of the jackpot 1 signal is turned off. On the other hand, after the end of the first big hit, it is in a time saving state (general power support state) or a probability change state (specific game state, probability fluctuation state), and the output of the big hit 2 signal is maintained in the on state.

After that, the signal output after the occurrence of the second big hit from time t14 to time t16 is
FIG. 81 is the same as the signal output from time t3 to time t5 described above.

When a power failure occurs during the second big hit, the time saving state, or the probability change state, the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal are similarly turned off. Then, when the power is restored and the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the game machine 10 is normally restored to the state before the power failure by the power failure recovery process (A1045) of the main process, and the second big hit, the time saving state or the probability change state is restarted. can do.

[Timing chart when a memory error occurs after a power failure in a special game state]
In the fourth embodiment with reference to FIG. 83, the timing of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state and a memory abnormality occurs in the power recovery will be described. FIG. 83 shows the fourth
It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the signal output and the like when the power failure occurs in the special gaming state which concerns on embodiment, and the memory abnormality occurs in power recovery.

At time t1, the first big hit (special game state) occurs as in FIG. 81 described above, and after the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal are output, a power failure occurs during the first big hit at time t21. When it occurs, the power of the game machine 10 is turned off and the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are also turned off.

At time t22, when the power was restored and the power of the game machine 10 was turned on, the RAM (here RA)
When the memory error of M111c) occurs, the output of the security signal is turned on. Specifically, it is determined that the RAM error flag is set in the main process (A102).
The result of 2 is "Y"), and the on-data of the security signal is output (A1026). On the other hand, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are turned off as signals other than the security signal (
A1026). Further, while the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated to wait and wait, the interrupt remains disabled (A1001), and the timer interrupt process capable of executing the special figure 1 and 2 game process and the normal figure game process. Since (Fig. 7) cannot be executed, the game (special figure variation display game, normal figure variation display game) cannot be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent RAM abnormality from being reflected in the game.

The output state (on state) of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal saved (stored) as save data (stored information) in the RAM at the time of power failure is read by the power failure recovery process at the time of power recovery. Therefore, at the time of normal restoration, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal can be output as shown by the broken line in FIG. 83. However, since the RAM memory abnormality has occurred, the game control device 100 turns on the security signal as shown by the solid line in FIG. 83, while holding the jackpot 1 signal as shown by the broken line in FIG. 83. And the jackpot 2 signal is not output.

After that, at time t23, when the power is turned off once and then turned on, it is determined that the setting key switch 93 (setting key) and the RAM initialization switch 112 are pressed (on) (the result of A1021 is). “Y”), the state shifts to the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state), the probability setting value is cleared due to a RAM error (A1028), and the security signal is turned on (A1034). Then, the setting key switch 93 is turned off (A1036).
The result is "Y"), and when the setting change state is completed, 0 clear (RAM clear) of the RAM area other than the probability set value is performed (A1042), and the settings are initialized (A1043, A1044).
Therefore, the security signal is turned off, and the held jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal are also turned off. Further, the memory abnormality of the game machine 10 is resolved. On the other hand, the jackpot state is also reset, the gaming machine 10 is in the normal gaming state, and the stop symbol is also out of alignment.

In addition, when a power failure occurs during the second big hit, a time saving state, or a probability change state, a memory abnormality occurs in the same manner, RAM is cleared and initialized, and the game machine 10 is in the normal game state. Become.

[Timing chart when shifting to the setting confirmation state after a power failure in the special game state]
With reference to FIG. 84, in the fourth embodiment, the timing of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state, the power is restored to normal, and the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) is entered will be described. To do. FIG. 84 shows a power failure caused by a power failure during the special gaming state according to the fourth embodiment.
It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing such as a signal output at the time of normal recovery by power restoration and transition to a setting confirmation state.

When the first big hit occurs at time t1 and the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal are output, and then a power failure occurs during the first big hit at time t31, the game machine 10
When the power is turned off, one jackpot signal and two jackpot signals are also turned off.

At time t32, when the setting key switch 93 of the game machine 10 is turned on (RAM initialization switch 112 is off), the power is restored and the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the probability setting checking flag is set. (A1032), the game machine 10 shifts to a setting confirmation state in which the probability setting value (setting value) can be confirmed (A1305).

When the setting confirmation state is entered at time t32, a security signal is output as shown in FIG. 84 (A2406). On the other hand, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are turned off as signals other than the security signal, as shown by the solid line in FIG. 83 (A2406).

As described above in FIG. 83, the output state (on state) of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal is saved in the RAM during a power failure (A1057, A1058), and also during power recovery in FIG.
As shown by a broken line in 4, save data relating to the output state (on state) of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal is held.

Then, at time t33, the setting key switch 93 of the game machine 10 is turned off (A1036).
When the power failure recovery process is performed (A1045), the security signal is turned off.

In addition, the output status of the jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal saved (stored) as save data (stored information) in the RAM at the time of a power failure is read by the power failure recovery process and turned on after the setting confirmation state is completed. Become. Therefore, when the setting confirmation state ends, the first big hit game is restarted. Then, the same number of rounds as the jackpot game (special game) during normal operation without a power failure is digested over the same time.

When the first jackpot ends at time t34, the output of the jackpot 1 signal is turned off. On the other hand, after the end of the first big hit, it is in a time saving state (general power support state) or a probability change state (specific game state, probability fluctuation state), and the output of the big hit 2 signal is maintained in the on state.

After that, the signal output after the occurrence of the second big hit from time t35 to time t36 is
FIG. 81 is the same as the signal output from time t3 to time t5 described above.

If a power failure occurs during the second big hit, time saving state, or probability change state, and the power is restored to the setting confirmation state, when the setting confirmation state ends, the main process power failure recovery process (A1)
By 045), the game machine 10 is normally restored to the state before the power failure, and the second big hit, the time saving state, or the probability change state can be restarted.

[Timing chart when shifting to the setting change state after a power failure in the special game state]
With reference to FIG. 85, in the fourth embodiment, a signal output or the like when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state, the power is restored to normal, and the state changes to the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state). The timing of is explained. FIG. 85 is a timing chart showing an example of timing such as signal output when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state according to the fourth embodiment, the power is restored to normal, and the state shifts to the setting change state.

Similar to FIG. 81 described above at time t1, when the first big hit occurs and one big hit signal and two big hit signals are output, and then a power failure occurs during the first big hit at time t41, the game machine 10
When the power is turned off, one jackpot signal and two jackpot signals are also turned off.

At time t42, when the setting key switch 93 of the game machine 10 is turned on and the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed (on), the power is restored and the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, the probability setting is changed. The middle flag is set (A1029), and the game machine 10 shifts to a setting change state in which the probability setting value (setting value) can be changed (A1305).

When the setting change state is entered at time t42, a security signal is output as shown in FIG. 85 (A2406). On the other hand, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are turned off as signals other than the security signal, as shown by the solid line in FIG. 85 (A2406).

As described above in FIG. 83, the output state (on state) of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal is saved in the RAM during a power failure (A1057, A1058), and also during power recovery in FIG.
As shown by the broken line in 5, save data relating to the output state (on state) of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal is held.

Then, at time t43, when the setting key switch 93 of the game machine 10 is turned off (A10).
Since the result of 36 is "Y"), the probability setting changing flag is set (A1040).
The result of is "Y"), and 0 clear (RAM clear) of the RAM area other than the probability set value is performed (RAM clear).
A1042), it is initialized (A1043, A1044). Therefore, the security signal is turned off, and the held jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal are also turned off. Therefore, when the setting change state is completed, the game machine 10 is normally restored, but the jackpot state is reset by clearing the RAM, and the game machine 10 is in the normal game state, and the stop symbol is also out of the symbol.

Even if a power failure occurs during the second big hit, time saving state, or probability change state, the RAM is cleared and initialized when the setting change state ends, and the game machine 10 is in the normal game state. It becomes.

[Timing chart when the power is turned off in the setting change state after a power failure in the special game state]
With reference to FIG. 86, in the fourth embodiment, a power failure occurs in the special gaming state, the power is restored normally by power recovery, and the power is turned off after shifting to the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state). The timing of signal output and the like when the power is set to is described. FIG. 86 shows an example of the timing of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state according to the fourth embodiment, the power is restored to normal by power recovery, the setting is changed, and then the power is turned off. It is a timing chart which shows.

The signal output when a power failure occurs from the occurrence of the first big hit from time t1 to time t52 and the power is restored in the setting changed state is the same as the signal output from time t1 to time t42 described above in FIG. 85. At time t52, when shifting to the setting change state, time t42 in FIG. 85
Similarly, the probability setting changing flag is set (A1029).

After that, at time t53, when the power is turned off (or when the power is cut off again) in the setting change state, the output of the security signal is turned off. As shown by the broken line in FIG. 85, the save data relating to the output state (on state) of the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal is retained as in the broken line up to FIG. 84. Further, since the save data saved in the RAM cannot be read when the power is turned off, the broken lines of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal when the power is turned off are turned off. The flag for changing the probability setting remains set (A10).
The result of 37 is "Y", A1057, A1058).

At time t54, with the RAM initialization switch 112 not turned on (A1021)
The result of is "N"), and when the power is turned on, the on-data of the security signal is output because the flag for changing the probability setting is set (the result of A1023 is "Y").
1026). On the other hand, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are turned off as signals other than the security signal, as shown by the solid line in FIG. 86 (A1026). Therefore, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are output in the RAM as save data (as shown by the broken line in FIG. 86).
(On state) is retained, but it is not output. Also, steps A1025 and A
Since the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) cannot be executed while waiting and waiting by repeating the process of 1026, the game (special figure variation display game, normal figure variation display game) cannot be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unexpected process (a process of power failure and power recovery in a setting change state) from being reflected in the game. After that, by clearing the RAM at the same time as the time t23 in FIG. 83 (A1042), the normal recovery can be performed, and at that time, the jackpot state is reset.

[Action / effect of the fourth embodiment]
The game machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result (stop result) of the game (for example, the special figure variable display game, the variable display game) becomes a special result (big hit result). A control means (game control device 100) capable of generating (big hit game state) is provided. The game machine 10 includes a holding storage means (RAM of the game control device 100) that stores information about the game and can store and hold the stored information even if a power failure occurs. The control means can output a signal (one jackpot signal) when a special gaming state occurs, and holds it during the restart process when the power is restored after a power failure occurs during the occurrence of the special gaming state. When an abnormality in the information recorded in the storage means is detected, a security signal for notifying the abnormality is output and a signal (big hit 1) is output.
No signal) is output.

According to such a game machine 10, when an abnormality in the information recorded in the holding storage means is detected during the restart process when the power is restored after the power failure occurs during the occurrence of the special gaming state. Does not output the signal (1 jackpot signal) that is output when the special gaming state occurs, but outputs the security signal, so that it is possible to notify that the gaming machine has been fraudulent when the power is restored. ..
By notifying fraud, the person in charge of the amusement park (game store) can take measures against fraud.

Further, the game machine 10 of the fourth embodiment includes setting changing means (game control device 100, setting key switch 93, RAM initialization switch 112) capable of changing the setting value (probability setting value) related to the game condition. The control means (game control device 100) can output a signal (big hit 1 signal) when a special game state (big hit game state) occurs, and a set value after a power failure occurs during the occurrence of the special game state. Outputs a security signal to notify an abnormality during the restart process when a power failure occurs and the power is restored in the changeable setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state), and a signal (1 jackpot signal) Is not output.

According to such a game machine 10, a signal (one jackpot signal) output when a special game state occurs is not output during the restart process when a power failure occurs and the power is restored in the setting change state. Since the security signal is output, it is possible to notify the game machine that an unexpected process is being performed in the setting change state. By this notification, the person in charge of the game hall (game store) can take a response to the fact that an unexpected process (a process of power failure and power recovery in the setting change state) is performed on the game machine.

Further, the game machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is advantageous to the player when the result (stop result) of the game (for example, the special figure variation display game, the variation display game) becomes a special result (big hit result). A control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a game state (big hit game state) and a specific game state (time saving state, probability change state) is provided. The game machine 10 stores information about the game, and holds and stores the stored information even if a power failure occurs (game control device 10).
It has 0 RAM). The control means is a signal (2 big hit signals) triggered by the occurrence of a special gaming state.
Can be output, and the signal can be output until the specific gaming state after the special gaming state ends, and after a power failure occurs during the occurrence of the special gaming state or the specific gaming state, the power is restored when the power is restored. If an abnormality in the information recorded in the holding / storing means is detected during the activation process, a security signal for notifying the abnormality is output, and no signal (2 jackpot signals) is output.

According to such a game machine 10, after a power failure occurs during the occurrence of a special game state or a specific game state, an abnormality in the information recorded in the holding storage means is detected during the restart process when the power is restored. If it is detected, the signal (2 jackpot signals) that is output when the special gaming state occurs is not output, but the security signal is output. Therefore, when the power is restored, the gaming machine is fraudulent. It can be notified that. By notifying fraud, the person in charge of the amusement park (game store) can take measures against fraud.

Further, the game machine 10 of the fourth embodiment includes setting changing means (game control device 100, setting key switch 93, RAM initialization switch 112) capable of changing the setting value (probability setting value) related to the game condition. The control means (game control device 100) can start outputting signals (big hit 2 signals) when a special game state (big hit game state) occurs, and a specific game state (time saving state, probability change state) after the special game state. The signal can be output until the end of, and the setting value can be changed after a power failure occurs during the special gaming state or the specific gaming state (setting change state (
During the restart process when the power is restored due to a power failure in the setting change mode (setting variable state), the security signal for notifying the abnormality is output, and the signal (big hit 2 signals) is not output.

According to such a game machine 10, the signal (2 jackpot signals) output when the special game state occurs is not output during the restart process when the power is restored due to a power failure in the setting change state. Since the security signal is output, it is possible to notify the game machine that an unexpected process is being performed in the setting change state. By this notification, the person in charge of the game hall (game store) can take a response to the fact that an unexpected process (a process of power failure and power recovery in the setting change state) is performed on the game machine.

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea, and it is clear that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Is. For example, it is possible to combine a plurality of embodiments. Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims and is intended to include all modifications within the scope of meaning and content equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 Game machine 12 Front frame (game frame)
25 Direction button 30 Game board 32 Game area 36 1st start winning opening (1st start winning area)
37 Ordinary variable winning device 38 1st special variable winning device 39 2nd special variable winning device 40 Center case 41 Display device 44 Board effect device 46 Board decoration device 50 Collective display device (LED)
93 Setting key switch 100 Game control device (main board)
112 RAM initialization switch 152 Performance display device 200 Payout control device 300 Production control device (sub-board)
400 power supply

Claims (1)

An effect control means capable of executing an effect related to a variable display game that displays identification information in a variable manner is provided, and when the stop result of the variable display game is a special result, a special gaming state advantageous to the player can be generated. In the game machine
Equipped with a setting change means that can change the setting value according to the setting related to the game
The effect control means can execute a setting suggestion effect suggesting information about the set value a plurality of times in the variation display game, and the appearance of the setting suggestion effect makes the stop result of the variation display game special. A game machine characterized in that it can notify the expected degree as a result.